New Product

Digital Temperature Controller

E5@C/E5@C-T

E5@C Series That Pursues Greater Visibility with Large White PV Display.
Added new models with Push-In Plus Terminal that Reduce Wiring Work.
Digital Temperature Controllers: E5@C Series

Models with Screw Terminal /

page 2
48 × 24 mm Models with Screwless Clamp E5GC
Terminal

Models with Screw Terminal E5CC page 16

48 × 48 mm Models with Push-In Plus Terminal page 16

E5CC-B

page 16
Plug-in Models E5CC-U

page 36
Models with Screw Terminal E5EC
48 × 96 mm
page 36
Models with Push-In Plus Terminal E5EC-B

96 × 96 mm Models with Screw Terminal E5AC page 36

DIN 22.5-mm-wide Models with Screw Terminal E5DC page 54

Controllers That
Mount to DIN Track

Programmable Digital Temperature Controllers: E5@C-T Series

page 68
48 × 48 mm Models with Screw Terminal E5CC-T

page 84
48 × 96 mm Models with Screw Terminal E5EC-T

page 84
96 × 96 mm Models with Screw Terminal E5AC-T

1
 Digital Temperature Controller

E5GC (48  24 mm)

Easy Operation and High Performance of

the E5@C Series in a Compact 48  24-
mm Body
• A compact body of 48  24  90 mm (W H D) that is ideal for
small equipment, laboratory instruments, and others.
• White PV display with a height of 10.5 mm for high visibility even
with the compact body.
• Removable terminal block to simplify maintenance. Select from
screw terminal or screwless clamp terminal for the wiring 48  24 mm
E5GC
method.
• High-speed sampling at 50 ms.
• Easy connections to a PLC with programless communications. Refer to your OMRON website for the most recent
information on applicable safety standards.
• Set up the Controller without wiring the power supply by
connecting to the computer with a Communications Conversion Refer to Safety Precautions on 108.
Cable (sold separately). Setup is easy with the CX-Thermo (sold
separately).

Main I/O Functions

Sensor Input E5GC

Universal input
• Thermocouple Dual displays: PV/SV 4-digit displays
• Pt
• Analog current/voltage
Control Output 1
Indication Accuracy
• Thermocouple input: • Relay output
±0.3% of PV • Voltage output (for driving SSR)
• Pt input: ±0.2% of PV
• Analog input: ±0.2% of FS • Linear current output

Sampling Period
• 50 ms
Auxiliary Outputs
• None
• PF (shift) Key
Event Inputs • Temperature status display •1
• None • Simple programming •2
•1 • Independent heating and
•2 cooling PID control
• Changed parameter display
• Display brightness setting
Serial Communications
• Simple transfer output (only on
• None models with liner current outputs)
• RS-485 • Work Bit Message

This datasheet is provided as a guideline for selecting products.

Be sure to refer to the following manuals for application precautions and other information required for operation before attempting
to use the product.
E5@C Digital Temperature Controllers User’s Manual (Cat. No. H174)
E5@C Digital Temperature Controllers Communications Manual (Cat. No. H175)

2
 E5GC
Model Number Legend and Standard Models
Model Number Legend
E5GC-@@ @ @ @ M-@@@ (Example: E5GC-RX1A6M-015)
     
A B C D E F

A B C D E F
Model Control No. of Power Meaning
Terminal Input
outputs 1 auxiliary supply Options
type type
and 2 outputs voltage
E5GC 48  24 mm
Control output 1 Control output 2
RX Relay output None
Voltage output
QX None
(for driving SSR)
*1 CX Linear current output None
*2 0 None
1 1
2 2
A 100 to 240 VAC
D 24 VAC/DC
6 Screw terminal (with cover)
C Screwless clamp terminal *6
M Universal input
HB alarm and HS alarm Communications Event inputs
000 --- --- ---
015 --- RS-485 ---
*3 016 --- --- 1
*3, *4 023 1 --- ---
*5 024 --- --- 2
*1. The control output can be used as a simple transfer output.
*2. Only option 000 can be selected if an auxiliary output is zero.
*3. Option 016 and 023 can be selected only if two auxiliary outputs are selected.
*4. Option with HB and HS alarms (023) cannot be selected if a linear current output is selected for the control output.
*5. Option 024 can be selected only if one auxiliary output is selected.
*6. The specifications are different for Temperature Controllers with Push-In Plus terminal. Refer to Precautions when Wiring on page 114.

Heating and Cooling Control

Using Heating and Cooling Control
A Control Output Assignment
An auxiliary output is used as the cooling control output.
B Control
If PID control is used, you can set PID control separately for heating and cooling.
This allows you to handle control systems with different heating and cooling response characteristics.

3
 E5GC

Optional Products (Order Separately)

USB-Serial Conversion Cable Waterproof Packing
Model Model
E58-CIFQ2 Y92S-P12
Note: This Waterproof Packing is provided with the Digital
Communications Conversion Cable Temperature Controller.
Model
E58-CIFQ2-E Draw-out Jig
Note: Always use this product together with the E58-CIFQ2. Model
This Cable is used to connect to the bottom-panel Setup Tool Y92F-55
port.

Current Transformers (CTs) CX-Thermo Support Software

Hole diameter Model Model
5.8 mm E54-CT1 EST2-2C-MV4
12.0 mm E54-CT3 Note: CX-Thermo version 4.62 or higher is required for the E5GC.
For the system requirements for the CX-Thermo, refer to
Mounting Adapter information on the EST2-2C-MV4 on the OMRON website
(www.ia.omron.com).
Model
Y92F-53 (2pcs)
Note: This Mounting Adapter is provided with the Digital Temperature
Controller.

4
 E5GC
Specifications
Ratings
A in model number: 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Power supply voltage
D in model number: 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz; 24 VDC
Operating voltage range 85 to 110% of rated supply voltage
Power consumption 5.9 VA max. at 100 to 240 VAC, and 3.2 VA max. at 24 VAC or 1.8 W max. at 24 VDC
Temperature input
Thermocouple: K, J, T, E, L, U, N, R, S, B, W, or PL II
Platinum resistance thermometer: Pt100 or JPt100
Sensor input Infrared temperature sensor (ES1B): 10 to 70C, 60 to 120C, 115 to 165C, or 140 to 260C
Analog input
Current input: 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 20 mA
Voltage input: 1 to 5 V, 0 to 5 V, or 0 to 10 V
Current input: 150  max., Voltage input: 1 M min. (Use a 1:1 connection when connecting the ES2-HB/
Input impedance
THB.)
Control method ON/OFF control or 2-PID control (with auto-tuning)
SPST-NO, 250 VAC, 2 A (resistive load), electrical life: 100,000 operations, minimum applicable load: 5
Relay output
V, 10 mA (reference value)
Control
Voltage output
output Output voltage 12 VDC 20% (PNP), max. Load current: 21 mA, with short-circuit protection circuit
(for driving SSR)
Linear current output 4 to 20 mA DC/0 to 20 mA DC, load: 500  max., resolution: Approx. 10,000
Number of outputs 1 or 2 (depends on model)
Auxiliary
output SPST-NO relay outputs, 250 VAC, 2 A (resistive load),
Output specifications
Electrical life: 100,000 operations, Minimum applicable load: 10 mA at 5 V (reference value)
Number of inputs 1 or 2 (depends on model)
Event Contact input ON: 1 k max., OFF: 100 k min.
input External contact input
Non-contact input ON: Residual voltage 1.5 V max.; OFF: Leakage current 0.1 mA max.
specifications
Current flow: approx. 7 mA per contact
Setting method Digital setting using front panel keys
11-segment digital displays and individual indicators
Indication method
Character height: PV: 10.5 mm, SV: 5.0 mm
Up to eight set points (SP0 to SP7) can be saved and selected using the event inputs, key operations, or
Multi SP
serial communications. *
Bank switching None
Manual output, heating/cooling control, loop burnout alarm, SP ramp, other alarm functions, heater
burnout (HB) alarm (including SSR failure (HS) alarm), 40% AT, 100% AT, MV limiter, input digital filter,
Other functions self tuning, robust tuning, PV input shift, run/stop, protection functions, extraction of square root, MV
change rate limit, logic operations, temperature status display, simple programming, moving average of
input value, display brightness setting, simple transfer output, and work bit message
10 to 55C (with no condensation or icing), For 3-year warranty: 10 to 50C with standard mounting (with
Ambient operating temperature
no condensation or icing)
Ambient operating humidity 25 to 85%
Storage temperature 25 to 65C (with no condensation or icing)
Altitude 2,000 m max.
Recommended fuse T2A, 250 VAC, time-lag, low-breaking capacity
Installation environment Overvoltage category II, Pollution Degree 2 (EN/IEC/UL 61010-1)
* There are up to four event inputs.

5
 E5GC

Input Ranges
Thermocouple/Platinum Resistance Thermometer (Universal inputs)
Sensor Platinum resistance Infrared temperature
Thermocouple
type thermometer sensor
Sensor 10 to 60 to 115 to 140 to
Pt100 JPt100 K J T E L U N R S B W PLII 70°C 120°C 165°C 260°C
specification
2300
2300
1800
1800
1700 1700
1700
1600
1500
1400
1300 1300 1300
1300
Temperature range (°C)

1200
1100
1000
850 850 850
900
800
700
600
600
500.0 500.0 500.0
500
400.0 400 400.0 400 400.0
400
260
300
120 165
200
100.0 100.0 90
100
100
0.0 0.0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-100
-20.0 -100 -20.0 -100
-200
-200 -199.9 -199.9 -200 -200 -199.9 -200 -200 -199.9 -200
Set value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Shaded settings are the default settings.

The applicable standards for the input types are as follows:

K, J, T, E, N, R, S, B: JIS C 1602-1995, IEC 60584-1 JPt100: JIS C 1604-1989, JIS C 1606-1989
L: Fe-CuNi, DIN 43710-1985 Pt100: JIS C 1604-1997, IEC 60751
U: Cu-CuNi, DIN 43710-1985 PL II: According to Platinel II electromotive force charts from BASF (previously Engelhard)
W: W5Re/W26Re, ASTM E988-1990

Analog input
Input type Current Voltage
Input specification 4 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA 1 to 5 V 0 to 5 V 0 to 10 V
Usable in the following ranges by scaling:
Setting range -1999 to 9999, -199.9 to 999.9,
-19.99 to 99.99 or -1.999 to 9.999
Set value 25 26 27 28 29

6
 E5GC

Alarm Types
Each alarm can be independently set to one of the following 17 alarm types. The default is 2: Upper limit. (See note.)
Auxiliary outputs are allocated to alarms. ON delays and OFF delays (0 to 999 s) can also be specified.
Note: In the default settings for models with HB or HS alarms, alarm 1 is set to a heater alarm (HA) and the Alarm Type 1 parameter is not displayed.
To use alarm 1, set the output assignment to alarm 1.

Alarm output operation

Set
Alarm type When alarm value X When alarm value X Description of function
value
is positive is negative
0 Alarm function OFF Output OFF No alarm
Set the upward deviation in the set point for the alarm upper
ON
L H limit (H) and the lower deviation in the set point for the alarm
1 Upper- and lower-limit *1 * 2
OFF
SP
PV lower limit (L). The alarm is ON when the PV is outside this
deviation range.
Set the upward deviation in the set point by setting the alarm
2 ON
X
ON
X
Upper-limit value (X). The alarm is ON when the PV is higher than the
(default) OFF
SP
PV OFF
SP
PV
SP by the deviation or more.
X X Set the downward deviation in the set point by setting the
ON ON
3 Lower-limit OFF PV OFF PV
alarm value (X). The alarm is ON when the PV is lower than
SP SP
the SP by the deviation or more.
Set the upward deviation in the set point for the alarm upper
Upper- and lower-limit ON
L H limit (H) and the lower deviation in the set point for the alarm
4 * 3
range *1 OFF
SP
PV lower limit (L). The alarm is ON when the PV is inside this
deviation range.
Upper- and lower-limit with ON
L H A standby sequence is added to the upper- and lower-limit
5 *4
standby sequence *1 *5
OFF
SP
PV alarm (1). *6
Upper-limit with standby ON
X
ON
X
6 A standby sequence is added to the upper-limit alarm (2). *6
sequence OFF
SP
PV OFF
SP
PV

Lower-limit with standby ON

X
ON
X
7 A standby sequence is added to the lower-limit alarm (3). *6
sequence OFF
SP
PV OFF
SP
PV

Absolute-value upper- ON
X
ON
X The alarm will turn ON if the process value is larger than the
8
limit OFF
0
PV OFF
0
PV alarm value (X) regardless of the set point.
ON
X
ON
X The alarm will turn ON if the process value is smaller than the
9 Absolute-value lower-limit OFF
0
PV OFF
0
PV alarm value (X) regardless of the set point.
Absolute-value upper-
ON
X
ON
X A standby sequence is added to the absolute-value upper-
10 limit with standby OFF
0
PV OFF
0
PV limit alarm (8). *6
sequence
Absolute-value lower-limit ON
X
ON
X A standby sequence is added to the absolute-value lower-
11
with standby sequence OFF
0
PV OFF
0
PV limit alarm (9). *6
12 LBA (alarm 1 type only) - *7
13 PV change rate alarm - *8
SP absolute-value ON
X
ON
X This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the set point (SP)
14
upper-limit alarm OFF
0
SP OFF
0
SP is higher than the alarm value (X).
SP absolute-value ON
X
ON
X This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the set point (SP)
15
lower-limit alarm OFF
0
SP OFF
0
SP is lower than the alarm value (X).
Standard Control Standard Control
X X
ON ON
OFF MV OFF MV
0 0
MV absolute-value This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the manipulated
16 Heating/Cooling
upper-limit alarm *9 Heating/Cooling variable (MV) is higher than the alarm value (X).
Control (Heating MV) Control (Heating MV)
X
ON
OFF
0
MV Always ON
Standard Control Standard Control
X X
ON ON
OFF MV OFF MV
0 0
MV absolute-value This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the manipulated
17 Heating/Cooling Heating/Cooling
lower-limit alarm *9 variable (MV) is lower than the alarm value (X).
Control (Cooling MV) Control (Cooling MV)
X
ON
OFF
0
MV Always ON

7
 E5GC

*1. With set values 1, 4, and 5, the upper- and lower-limit values can *4. Set value: 5, Upper- and lower-limit with standby sequence
be set independently for each alarm type, and are expressed as For Upper- and Lower-Limit Alarm Described Above at *2
“L” and “H.” • In cases 1 and 2 above, the alarm is always OFF if the upper-
*2. Set value: 1, Upper- and lower-limit alarm and lower-limit hysteresis overlaps.
Case 1 Case 2 Case 3 (Always OFF) • In case 3, the alarm is always OFF.
H<0, L<0 *5. Set value: 5, Upper- and lower-limit alarm with standby sequence
L H SP SP L H H SP L The alarm is always OFF if upper- and lower-limit hysteresis
H<0, L>0 overlaps.
H<0, L>0 H>0, L<0
H L SP |H| ≥ |L| *6. Refer to the E5@C Digital Temperature Controllers User’s Manual
|H| < |L| |H| > |L|
H>0, L<0 (Cat. No. H174) for information on the operation of the standby
SP H L |H| ≤ |L| sequence.
*3. Set value: 4, Upper- and lower-limit range *7. Refer to the E5@C Digital Temperature Controllers User’s Manual
Case 1 Case 2 Case 3 (Always ON) (Cat. No. H174) for information on the LBA.
H<0, L<0 *8. Refer to the E5@C Digital Temperature Controllers User’s Manual
L H SP SP L H H SP L (Cat. No. H174) for information on the PV change rate alarm.
H<0, L>0 H>0, L<0
H<0, L>0 *9. When heating/cooling control is performed, the MV absolute-
H L SP |H| ≥ |L| value upper-limit alarm functions only for the heating operation
|H| < |L| |H| > |L|
H>0, L<0 and the MV absolute-value lower-limit alarm functions only for the
SP H L |H| ≤ |L| cooling operation.

8
 E5GC

Characteristics
Thermocouple: (0.3 % of indication value or 1C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max.*1
Indication accuracy Platinum resistance thermometer: (0.2 % of indication value or 0.8C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max.
(at the temperature of 23C) Analog input: 0.2% FS 1 digit max.
CT input: 5% FS 1 digit max.
Simple transfer output accuracy 0.3% FS max.*2
Influence of temperature *3 Thermocouple input (R, S, B, W, PL II): (1% of indication value or 10C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max.
Other thermocouple input: (1% of indication value or 4C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max. *4
Influence of voltage *3 Platinum resistance thermometer: (1% of indication value or 2C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max.
Influence of EMS. Analog input: 1% FS 1 digit max.
(at EN 61326-1) CT input: 5% FS 1 digit max.
Input sampling period 50 ms
Temperature input: 0.1 to 999.9C or F (in units of 0.1C or F)
Hysteresis
Analog input: 0.01% to 99.99% FS (in units of 0.01% FS)
Temperature input: 0.1 to 999.9C or F (in units of 0.1C or F)
Proportional band (P)
Analog input: 0.1% to 999.9% FS (in units of 0.1% FS)
Integral time (I) 0 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.0 to 999.9 s (in units of 0.1 s) *5
Derivative time (D) 0 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.0 to 999.9 s (in units of 0.1 s) *5
Temperature input: 0.1 to 999.9C or F (in units of 0.1C or F)
Proportional band (P) for cooling
Analog input: 0.1% to 999.9% FS (in units of 0.1% FS)
Integral time (I) for cooling 0 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.0 to 999.9 s (in units of 0.1 s) *5
Derivative time (D) for cooling 0 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.0 to 999.9 s (in units of 0.1 s) *5
Control period 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1 to 99 s (in units of 1 s)
Manual reset value 0.0% to 100.0% (in units of 0.1%)
Alarm setting range 1,999 to 9,999 (decimal point position depends on input type)
Influence of signal source
Thermocouple: 0.1C/ max. (100  max.), Platinum resistance thermometer: 0.1C/ max. (10  max.)
resistance
Insulation resistance 20 M min. (at 500 VDC)
100 to 240 VAC: 3,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between terminals of different charge
Dielectric strength
24 VAC/DC: 2,300 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between terminals of different charge
Malfunction 10 to 55 Hz, 20 m/s2 for 10 min each in X, Y and Z directions
Vibration
Resistance 10 to 55 Hz, 20 m/s2 for 2 hr each in X, Y, and Z directions
Malfunction 100 m/s2, 3 times each in X, Y, and Z directions
Shock
Resistance 300 m/s2, 3 times each in X, Y, and Z directions
Weight Controller: Approx. 80 g, Adapter: Approx. 4 g  2
Degree of protection Front panel: IP66, Rear case: IP20, Terminals: IP00
Memory protection Non-volatile memory (number of writes: 1,000,000 times)
Setup Tool CX-Thermo version 4.62 or higher
E5GC side panel: An E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable is used to connect a USB port on the
computer. *6
Setup Tool port
E5GC bottom panel: An E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable and E58-CIFQ2-E Conversion Cable
are used together to connect a USB port on the computer. *6
cULus: UL 61010-1/CSA C22.2 No.61010-1, Korean wireless regulations (Radio law: KC Mark) (Some
Approved standards
Standards models only.) *7
Conformed standards EN 61010-1 (IEC 61010-1)
EMI: EN61326-1 *8
Radiated Interference Electromagnetic Field Strength: EN55011 Group 1, class A
Noise Terminal Voltage: EN55011 Group 1, class A
EMS: EN61326-1 *8
ESD Immunity: EN61000-4-2
EMC
Electromagnetic Field Immunity: EN61000-4-3
Burst Noise Immunity: EN61000-4-4
Conducted Disturbance Immunity: EN61000-4-6
Surge Immunity: EN61000-4-5
Voltage Dip/Interrupting Immunity: EN61000-4-11
*1. The indication accuracy of K thermocouples in the 200 to 1,300C range, T and N thermocouples at a temperature of 100C max., and U
and L thermocouples at any temperature is 2C 1 digit max. The indication accuracy of B thermocouples at a temperature of 400C max. is
not specified. The indication accuracy of B thermocouples at a temperature of 400 to 800C is 3C max.
The indication accuracy of R and S thermocouples at a temperature of 200C max. is 3C 1 digit max. The indication accuracy of W
thermocouples is (0.3% of PV or 3C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max.
The indication accuracy of PLII thermocouples is (0.3% of PV or 2C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max.
*2. However, the precision between 0 and 4 mA for a 0 to 20 mA output is 1% FS max.
*3. Ambient temperature: 10C to 23C to 55C, Voltage range: 15% to 10% of rated voltage
*4. K thermocouple at 100C max.: 10C max.
*5. The unit is determined by the setting of the Integral/Derivative Time Unit parameter.
*6. External serial communications (RS-485) and USB-Serial Conversion Cable communications can be used at the same time.
*7. Refer to your OMRON website for the most recent information on applicable models.
*8. Industrial electromagnetic environment (EN/IEC 61326-1 Table 2)

9
 E5GC

USB-Serial Conversion Cable When Digital Temperature Controllers are connected,

set points and RUN/STOP commands can be sent
Applicable OS Windows XP/Vista/7/8/10 *1 from the Digital Temperature Controller that is set as
Applicable software CX-Thermo version 4.62 or higher Component
the master to the Digital Temperature Controllers that
Communi-
Applicable models E5@C-T Series, E5@C Series, and E5CB Series are set as slaves.
cations
USB interface standardConforms to USB Specification 2.0 Slope and offsets can be set for the set point.
Number of connected Digital Temperature
DTE speed 38,400 bps Controllers: 32 max. (including master)
Computer: USB (Type A plug) When Digital Temperature Controllers are connected,
Connector
Digital Temperature Controller: Special serial the parameters can be copied from the Digital
specifications Copying *
connector Temperature Controller that is set as the master to the
Power supply Bus power (Supplied from the USB host controller) *2 Digital Temperature Controllers that are set as slaves.
Power supply voltage 5 VDC MELSEC is a registered trademark of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.
Current KEYENCE is a registered trademark of Keyence Corporation.
450 mA max.
consumption * Both the programless communications and the component
4.70.2 VDC (Supplied from USB-Serial Conversion communications support the copying.
Output voltage
Cable to the Digital Temperature Controller.)
Output current
250 mA max. (Supplied from USB-Serial Conversion Current Transformer (Order Separately)
Cable to the Digital Temperature Controller.) Ratings
Ambient operating
0 to 55C (with no condensation or icing) Dielectric strength 1,000 VAC for 1 min
temperature
Ambient operating Vibration resistance 50 Hz, 98 m/s2
10% to 80% E54-CT1: Approx. 11.5 g,
humidity Weight
Storage temperature 20 to 60C (with no condensation or icing) E54-CT3: Approx. 50 g
Storage humidity 10% to 80% Accessories Armatures (2)
(E54-CT3 only) Plugs (2)
Altitude 2,000 m max.
Weight Approx. 120 g
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the
Heater Burnout Alarms and SSR Failure
United States and or other countries. Alarms
*1. CX-Thermo version 4.65 or higher runs on Windows 10. CT input (for heater Models with detection for single-phase
*2. Use a high-power port for the USB port. current detection) heaters: One input
Note: A driver must be installed on the computer. Refer to the Instruction
Maximum heater current 50 A AC
Manual included with the Cable for the installation procedure.
Input current
5% FS 1 digit max.
Communications Specifications indication accuracy
Heater burnout alarm 0.1 to 49.9 A (in units of 0.1 A)
Transmission line
RS-485: Multidrop setting range *1 Minimum detection ON time: 100 ms *3
connection method
0.1 to 49.9 A (in units of 0.1 A)
Communications RS-485 (two-wire, half duplex) SSR failure alarm setting
Minimum detection OFF time: 100 ms
Synchronization method Start-stop synchronization range *2
*4
Protocol CompoWay/F, or Modbus *1. For heater burnout alarms, the heater current will be measured
Baud rate * 9,600, 19,200, 38,400, or 57,600 bps when the control output is ON, and the output will turn ON if the
Transmission code ASCII heater current is lower than the set value (i.e., heater burnout
Data bit length * 7 or 8 bits detection current value).
*2. For SSR failure alarms, the heater current will be measured when
Stop bit length * 1 or 2 bits the control output is OFF, and the output will turn ON if the heater
Vertical parity (none, even, odd) current is higher than the set value (i.e., SSR failure detection
Block check character (BCC) current value).
Error detection
with CompoWay/F or *3. The value is 30 ms for a control period of 0.1 s or 0.2 s.
CRC-16 with Modbus *4. The value is 35 ms for a control period of 0.1 s or 0.2 s.
Flow control None
Interface RS-485 Electrical Life Expectancy Curve for
Retry function None Control Output Relay (Reference Values)
Communications buffer 217 bytes
500
Life (× 104 operations)

Communications 0 to 99 ms 300
response wait time Default: 20 ms 200
* The baud rate, data bit length, stop bit length, and vertical parity can
100
be individually set using the Communications Setting Level. E5GC
250 VAC, 30 VDC
50
Communications Functions 30
(resistive load)
cosφ = 1

You can use the memory in the PLC to read and write 20
E5@C parameters, start and stop operation, etc.
10
The E5@C automatically performs communications with
PLCs. No communications programming is required. 5
Number of connected Digital Temperature
3
Programless Controllers: 32 max. (Up to 16 for the FX Series)
2
communica- Applicable PLCs: OMRON PLCs
tions CS Series, CJ Series, or CP Series 1
0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 1 2 3 5 10
Mitsubishi Electric PLCs
MELSEC Q Series, L Series, or FX Series Switching current (A)
(compatible with the FX2 or FX3 (excluding the FX1S))
KEYENCE PLCs
KEYENCE KV Series

10
 E5GC
External Connections
E5GC
Control Outputs

Relay output E5GC-@ @ @ @ @ M - @ @ @

250 VAC, 2 A (1) (2)(3)(4)(5) (6)
(resistive load) ↑
Voltage output (for driving SSR) Terminal type
12 VDC, 21 mA
Auxiliary outputs 1, 2
Linear current output The E5GC is set for a K-type thermocouple (input type = 5) by
0 to 20 mA DC Relay outputs default. An input error (s.err) wil occur if the input type setting
4 to 20 mA DC 250 VAC, 2 A does not agree with the temperature sensor. Check the input type.
Load: 500 Ω max. (resistive load)

(6) Options
Use no-voltage inputs for the event inputs.
015 016 023 024 The polarity for non-contact inputs is given in parentheses.
Communications Event input 1 CT input Event inputs 1 and 2
(RS-485) (−)
EV2
(−)
RS-485 EV1 CT EV1
B(+) A(−)

7 8 9 7 8 9 7 8 9 7 8 9
(5) Sensor (Temperature/Analog) Input
− + + mA −

(3) Input Power Supply TC 10 11 12 I 10 11 12

100 to 240 VAC 24 VAC/DC − V +

7 8 9 10 11 12 A B B
1 2 1 2
Pt 10 11 12 V 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6
(no polarity)

(2) Auxiliary Outputs

Auxiliary Auxiliary outputs 1, 2
(1) Control Outputs output 1 Auxiliary
RX QX CX output 2
Relay output Voltage output (for driving SSR) Linear current output 9
R Q C
+ − + −

5 6 5 6
3 4 3 4 3 4 Auxiliary Auxiliary
output 1 output 1

Note: 1. The application of the terminals depends on the model.

2. Do not wire the terminals that are shown with a gray background.
3. When complying with EMC standards, the cable that connects the sensor must be 30 m or less.
If the cable length exceeds 30 m, compliance with EMC standards will not be possible.
4. Connect M3 crimped terminals.

Isolation/Insulation Block Diagrams

Sensor input and CT input

Communications and event inputs

Power
Voltage output (for driving SSR) and linear current output
supply

Relay output

Auxiliary outputs 1 and 2

: Reinforced insulation

: Functional isolation

Note: Auxiliary outputs 1 to 2 are not insulated.

11
 E5GC
Terminal Block Appearance
E5GC-@6 E5GC-@C
Controllers with Screw Terminal (M3 Screws) Controllers with Screwless Clamp Terminal

Controllers with Screw Terminal Controllers with Screwless Clamp Terminals

• Terminal type: Forked or round crimped terminals • Wire stripping length: 8 to 12 mm
• Tightening torque for all terminals: 0.43 to 0.58 N·m • Ferrules: 8 to 12 mm
0.8 to 1.4 mm

5.8 mm max.

8 to 12 mm 8 to 12 mm
5.8 mm max.

Wires:AWG24 to AWG18 (equal to a cross-sectional area of 0.21 to 0.82 mm2) braided or solid wires
Note: Refer to Precautions When Wiring E5GC (Controllers with Screwless Clamp Terminal) on page 115 for information on wiring Controllers
with screwless clamp terminal.

Nomenclature
E5GC
Front panel Left Side View of the E5GC

No. 1 display Left-panel

Setup Tool
Temperature unit PV or specified parameter port

No.2 display
SP or specified parameter value Bottom View of E5GC

Operation indicators

Press O Key once to go to Adjustment Level.

Use the U D Keys to set the parameter.
Press O Key for at least 3 seconds Bottom-panel Setup
to go to the Initial Setting Level. Tool port

Use the M Key to change Use S Key to change the

to another parameter. digit (default setting).

12
 E5GC
Dimensions (Unit: mm)

Controllers
E5GC-@6 Waterproof Packing (Accessory)
Controllers with Screw Mounting Adapter (Accessory)
63.6 Terminal Cover (Accessory)
Terminal 4 90
48 44.8
1

24 40.8 22 22

• Use two Mounting Adapters, either on the top and bottom or on the right and left.
• Setup Tool ports are provided as standard feature. Use these ports to connect a computer to the Digital Temperature Controller. The E58-
CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable is required to connect to the port on the side panel. The E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable
and E58-CIFQ2-E Communications Conversion Cable are required to connect to the port on the bottom panel. (You cannot leave either
port connected constantly during operation.)

Mounted Separately Horizontally Group Mounted

L1

22.2+0.3
0
To mount the Temperature Controller so that it is waterproof,
insert the Waterproof Packing onto the Temperature Controller.
40 min +1.0
45+0.60 L1=(48×n-2.5) +0 Group mounting does not allow waterproofing.
n: Number of mounted Controllers (2 ≤ n ≤ 6)
22.2+0.3
0

• To install the Temperature Controller, insert it into a square hole in a panel with a thickness of 1 to 8 mm, and then insert the enclosed
adapter so that it locks into the grooves on the top and bottom or on the left and right of the rear case.
• Tighten the two mounting screws on the top and bottom or on the right and left of the Mounting Adapters alternately little by little to main-
tain a balance, and tighten them to a torque of between 0.29 and 0.39 N·m.
• When two or more Temperature Controllers are mounted, make sure that the surrounding temperature does not exceed the allowable
operating temperature range given below.
Horizontal group mounting: 10 to 55C
• Use Temperature Controllers with Screwless Clamp Terminal for vertical group mounting.

E5GC-@C Waterproof Packing (Accessory)

Controllers with Screwless Mounting Adapter (Accessory)
63.6
Clamp Terminal 48
4 93
44.8
1

24 40.8 22 22

• Use two Mounting Adapters, either on the top and bottom or on the right and left.
• Setup Tool ports are provided as standard feature. Use these ports to connect a computer to the Digital Temperature Controller. The E58-
CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable is required to connect to the port on the side panel. The E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable
and E58-CIFQ2-E Communications Conversion Cable are required to connect to the port on the bottom panel. (You cannot leave either
port connected constantly during operation.)

Mounted Separately Horizontally Group Mounted Vertically Group Mounted

+0.6
L1 45 +0

22.2+0.3
0 To mount the Temperature Controller so
40 min
that it is waterproof, insert the Waterproof
+1.0
45+0.60 L1=(48×n-2.5) +0 Packing onto the Temperature Controller.
n: Number of mounted Controllers (2 ≤ n ≤ 6) L2 Group mounting does not allow waterproof-
22.2+0.3
0 ing.

L2=(24×n-1.5) +1.0
+0

• To install the Temperature Controller, insert it into a square hole in a panel with a thickness of 1 to 8 mm, and then insert the enclosed
adapter so that it locks into the grooves on the top and bottom or on the left and right of the rear case.
• Tighten the two mounting screws on the top and bottom or on the right and left of the Mounting Adapters alternately little by little to main-
tain a balance, and tighten them to a torque of between 0.29 and 0.39 N·m.
• When two or more Temperature Controllers are mounted, make sure that the surrounding temperature does not exceed the allowable
operating temperature range given below.
Horizontal group mounting: 10 to 55C
Vertical group mounting of two Controllers: 10 to 45C
Vertical group mounting of three or more Controllers: 10 to 40C
• If you use vertical group mounting, you cannot draw out the interior body of the Controller.

13
 E5GC
Accessories (Order Separately)
USB-Serial Conversion Cable (2110)

E58-CIFQ2 250 263 1510

LED (RD)

USB connector
(type A plug)
LED (PWR) Serial connector

LED (SD)

Conversion Cable
E58-CIFQ2-E
Conversion Cable Connecting to the E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable
(2110)
(1510) 250 263 1510

E58-CIFQ2 (Order separately) Conversion Cable

Note: Always use this product together with the E58-CIFQ2.

Current Transformers
E54-CT1 Thru-current (Io) vs. Output Voltage (Eo)
21
15
2.8 (Reference Values)
5.8 dia.
E54-CT1
7.5
Maximum continuous heater current: 50 A (50/60 Hz)
Number of windings: 4002
25 3
Winding resistance: 182 
10.5 100V
Output voltage (Eo) V (r.m.s.)

Frequency: 50 Hz

40 10 ∞
Distortion
Two, 3.5 dia. 1kΩ factor
10%
1
10 3%
1%
100mV
30

E54-CT3 2.36 dia. 10 100Ω

30
12 dia.
1 RL=10Ω
9

100μV

40 × 40
10
1 10 100mA 1 10 100 1,000A
Thru-current (Io) A (r.m.s.)

Two , M3 holes (depth: 4)

Thru-current (Io) vs. Output Voltage (Eo)
(Reference Values)
15 E54-CT3
Maximum continuous heater current: 120 A (50/60 Hz)
30 (Maximum continuous heater current for an OMRON Digital Tem-
perature Controller is 50 A.)
E54-CT3 Accessories Number of windings: 4002
• Armature Connection Example Winding resistance: 80.8 
100V
Output voltage (Eo) V (r.m.s.)

Armature Frequency: 50 Hz
Approx. 3 dia. Plug Distortion
∞
10 factor
1kΩ
Lead 10%
500Ω 3%
1 1%

18 100mV
100Ω
• Plug 10
50Ω

RL=10Ω

Approx. 6 dia. 1

(22) 100μV

10
1 10 100mA 1 10 100 1,000A
Thru-current (Io) A (r.m.s.)

14
 E5GC

Mounting Adapter
Y92F-53 (Two provided.)
One pair is provided with the Temperature
34.7
Controller. Order this Adapter separately if it
becomes lost or damaged.
12

11.8 9.4

Waterproof Packing
Y92S-P12

The Waterproof Packing is provided with the Temperature Controller.

Order the Waterproof Packing separately if it becomes lost or damaged.
The Waterproof Packing can be used to achieve an IP66 degree of protection.
(Deterioration, shrinking, or hardening of the waterproof packing may occur depending on the operating
environment. Therefore, periodic replacement is recommended to ensure the level of waterproofing
specified in IP66. The time for periodic replacement depends on the operating environment.
Be sure to confirm this point at your site. Consider three years a rough standard.)

Draw-out Jig
Y92F-55
Use this Draw-out Jig to remove the interior
body of the Digital Temperature Controller
from the case to perform maintenance
without removing the terminal wiring.
32.9

15 1.4
30.5

27.4
22
28.7
20

23

15
 Digital Temperature Controller

E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U (48  48 mm)

Large White PV Display That’s Easier to Read. *

Easy to Use, from Model Selection to (E5CC/-U) (E5CC-B)

* CSA conformance evaluation by UL.
Setup and Operation.
Models with Push-In Plus Terminal
Added to Lineup.
• The white PV display with a height of 15.2 mm improves visibility.
• High-speed sampling at 50 ms.
• Select from models with screw terminal, models with Push-In
48  48 mm
Plus terminal for reduced wiring work, and E5CC
Plug-in Models that can be removed from the terminal block.
Refer to your OMRON website for the most recent information on
• Short body with depth of only 60 mm. (Screw Terminal) applicable safety standards.
• Easy connections to a PLC with programless communications.
Refer to Safety Precautions on 108.
Use component communications to link Temperature
Controllers to each other.
• Set up the Controller without wiring the power supply by connecting to the computer with a Communications
Conversion Cable (sold separately). Setup is easy with the CX-Thermo (sold separately).

Main I/O Functions

E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U
Sensor Input
Universal input
• Thermocouple Dual displays: PV/SV 4-digit displays
• Pt
• Analog current/voltage Control Output 1
<E5CC/E5CC-U> <E5CC-B>
Indication Accuracy • Relay output • Relay output
• Thermocouple input • Voltage output • Voltage output
<E5CC/E5CC-B> ±0.3%PV (for driving SSR) (for driving SSR)
<E5CC-U>±1%PV • Linear current output
• Pt input: ±0.2% of PV
• Analog input: ±0.2% of FS
Control Output 2
Sampling Period <E5CC> <E5CC-B/E5CC-U>
• 50 ms • None • None
• Voltage output
Event Inputs (for driving SSR)
<E5CC> <E5CC-B> <E5CC-U>
• None • None • None Auxiliary Outputs
• PF (shift) Key
•2 •2
• Temperature status display <E5CC> <E5CC-B> <E5CC-U>
•4 •3 • 2 • None
• Simple programming
• Independent heating and •1
Remote SP Input cooling PID control •2
<E5CC> <E5CC-B/E5CC-U> • Changed parameter display
• None • None • Display brightness setting
•1 Transfer Output
<E5CC/E5CC-B> <E5CC-U>
• None • None
Serial Communications
•1
<E5CC/E5CC-B> <E5CC-U>
• None • None
• RS-485

This datasheet is provided as a guideline for selecting products.

Be sure to refer to the following manuals for application precautions and other information required for operation before attempting
to use the product.
E5@C Digital Temperature Controllers User’s Manual (Cat. No. H174)
E5@C Digital Temperature Controllers Communications Manual (Cat. No. H175)

16
 E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U
Model Number Legend and Standard Models
Model Number Legend
Models with Screw Terminal
E5CC-@@ 3 @ 5 M -@@@ (Example: E5CC-RX3A5M-000)
     
A B C D E F

A B C D E F
Model No. of Power Meaning
Control outputs Terminal Input
auxiliary supply Options
1 and 2 type type
outputs voltage
E5CC 48  48 mm
Control output 1 Control output 2
RX Relay output None
Voltage output
QX None
(for driving SSR)
*1 *3 CX Linear current output *2 None
Voltage output Voltage output
QQ
(for driving SSR) (for driving SSR)
Voltage output
CQ Linear current output *2
(for driving SSR)
3 3 (one common)
A 100 to 240 VAC
D 24 VAC/DC
5 Screw terminal (with cover)
M Universal input
HB alarm and Event Remote Transfer
Communications
HS alarm inputs SP Input output
000 --- --- --- --- ---
*1 001 1 --- 2 --- ---
2
*1 003 (for 3-phase RS-485 --- --- ---
heaters)
*3 004 --- RS-485 2 --- ---
005 --- --- 4 --- ---
006 --- --- 2 Provided.
007 --- --- 2 Provided. ---
*1. Options with HB and HS alarms (001 and 003) cannot be selected if a linear current output is selected for the control output.
*2. The control output cannot be used as a transfer output.
*3. Option 004 can be selected only when "CX" is selected for the control outputs.
Note: Draw-out-type models of the E5CC are available. Ask your OMRON representative for details.

Heating and Cooling Control

Using Heating and Cooling Control
A Control Output Assignment
If there is no control output 2, an auxiliary output is used as the cooling control output.
If there is a control output 2, the two control outputs are used for heating and cooling.
(It does not matter which output is used for heating and which output is used for cooling.)
B Control
If PID control is used, you can set PID control separately for heating and cooling.
This allows you to handle control systems with different heating and cooling response characteristics.

17
 E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U

Model Number Legend

Models with Push-In Plus Terminal
E5CC-@@ 2 @ B M -@@@ (Example: E5CC-RX2ABM-000)
     
A B C D E F

A B C D E F
Model No. of Power Meaning
Control outputs Terminal Input
auxiliary supply Options
1 and 2 type type
outputs voltage
E5CC 48  48 mm
Control output 1 Control output 2
RX Relay output None
Voltage output
QX None
(for driving SSR)
2 2 (one common)
A 100 to 240 VAC
D 24 VAC/DC
B Push-in plus terminal
M Universal input
HB alarm and Event Remote Transfer
Communications
HS alarm inputs SP Input output
000 --- --- --- --- ---
001 1 --- 2 --- ---
002 1 RS-485 --- --- ---
004 --- RS-485 2 --- ---
006 --- --- 2 --- Provided.

Heating and Cooling Control

Using Heating and Cooling Control
A Control Output Assignment
An auxiliary output is used as the cooling control output.
B Control
If PID control is used, you can set PID control separately for heating and cooling.
This allows you to handle control systems with different heating and cooling response characteristics.

18
 E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U

Model Number Legend

Plug-in Models
E5CC-@@ @ @ U M -000 (Example: E5CC-RW0AUM-000)
A B C D E F

A B C D E F
Model Control No. of Power Meaning
Terminal Input
outputs auxiliary supply Options
type type
1 and 2 outputs voltage
E5CC 48  48 mm
Control output 1 Control output 2
RW Relay output (SPDT) None
QX Voltage output (for driving SSR) None
CX Linear current output * None
0 None
1 1
2 2 (one common)
A 100 to 240 VAC
D 24 VAC/DC
U Plug-in model
M Universal input
HB alarm and HS Communi- Remote SP Transfer
Event inputs
alarm cations Input output
000 --- --- --- --- ---
* The control output can be used as a simple transfer output for the Digital Temperature Controllers manufactured in May 2014 or later.

List of Models
Options Model Model
No. of auxiliary Power supply voltage Power supply voltage
Control output HB alarm and No. of event
outputs Communications
HS alarm inputs
100 to 240 VAC 24 VAC/DC

--- E5CC-RW0AUM-000 E5CC-RW0DUM-000

Relay output 1 --- --- --- E5CC-RW1AUM-000 E5CC-RW1DUM-000
2 E5CC-RW2AUM-000 E5CC-RW2DUM-000
--- E5CC-QX0AUM-000 E5CC-QX0DUM-000
Voltage output
1 --- --- --- E5CC-QX1AUM-000 E5CC-QX1DUM-000
(for driving SSR)
2 E5CC-QX2AUM-000 E5CC-QX2DUM-000
--- E5CC-CX0AUM-000 E5CC-CX0DUM-000
Linear current
1 --- --- --- E5CC-CX1AUM-000 E5CC-CX1DUM-000
output
2 E5CC-CX2AUM-000 E5CC-CX2DUM-000

Heating and Cooling Control

Using Heating and Cooling Control
A Control Output Assignment
An auxiliary output is used as the cooling control output.
B Control
If PID control is used, you can set PID control separately for heating and cooling.
This allows you to handle control systems with different heating and cooling response characteristics.

19
 E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U

Optional Products (Order Separately)

USB-Serial Conversion Cable Front Covers
Model Type Model
E58-CIFQ2 Hard Front Cover Y92A-48H
Soft Front Cover Y92A-48D
Terminal Covers (for E5CC)
Model CX-Thermo Support Software
E53-COV17 Model
E53-COV23 (3pcs) EST2-2C-MV4
Note: The E53-COV10 cannot be used. Note: CX-Thermo version 4.5 or higher is required for the E5CC.
Refer to page 31 for the mounted dimensions. CX-Thermo version 4.61 or higher is required for the E5CC-U.
CX-Thermo version 4.65 or higher is required for the E5CC-B.
Waterproof Packing For the system requirements for the CX-Thermo, refer to
Model information on the EST2-2C-MV4 on the OMRON website
(www.ia.omron.com).
Y92S-P8
Note: The Waterproof Packing is provided only with E5CC/E5CC-B
Controllers.
The E5CC-U cannot be waterproofed even if the Waterproof
Packing is attached.

Current Transformers (CTs)

Hole diameter Model
5.8 mm E54-CT1
12.0 mm E54-CT3

Adapter
Model
Y92F-45
Note: Use this Adapter when the panel has already been prepared for
an E5B@ Controller.

Waterproof Cover
Model
Y92A-48N

Mounting Adapter
Model
Y92F-49
Note: This Mounting Adapter is provided with the Digital Temperature
Controller.

DIN Track Mounting Adapter (for E5CC)

Model
Y92F-52

Sockets (for E5CC-U)

Type Model
Front-connecting Socket P2CF-11
Front-connecting Socket with Finger Protection P2CF-11-E
Back-connecting Socket P3GA-11
Terminal Cover for Back-connecting socket
Y92A-48G
with Finger Protection

20
 E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U
Specifications
Ratings
A in model number: 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Power supply voltage
D in model number: 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz; 24 VDC
Operating voltage range 85% to 110% of rated supply voltage
Models with option selection of 000:5.2 VA max. at 100 to 240 VAC, and 3.1 VA max. at 24 VAC or
Power consumption 1.6 W max. at 24 VDC
All other models: 6.5 VA max. at 100 to 240 VAC, and 4.1 VA max. at 24 VAC or 2.3 W max. at 24 VDC
Temperature input
Thermocouple: K, J, T, E, L, U, N, R, S, B, W, or PL II
Platinum resistance thermometer: Pt100 or JPt100
Infrared temperature sensor (ES1B): 10 to 70°C, 60 to 120°C, 115 to 165°C, or 140 to 260°C
Sensor input
Analog input
Current input: 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 20 mA
Voltage input: 1 to 5 V, 0 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V,or 0 to 50 mV (The 0 to 50 mV range applies to the
E5CC-U only for those manufactured in May 2014 or later.)
Current input: 150  max., Voltage input: 1 M min.
Input impedance
(Use a 1:1 connection when connecting the ES2-HB/THB.)
Control method ON/OFF control or 2-PID control (with auto-tuning)
E5CC/E5CC-B: SPST-NO, 250 VAC, 3 A (resistive load), electrical life: 100,000 operations,
minimum applicable load: 5 V, 10 mA (reference value)
Relay output
E5CC-U: SPDT, 250 VAC, 3 A (resistive load), electrical life: 100,000 operations,
Control minimum applicable load: 5 V, 10 mA (reference value)
output
Voltage output
Output voltage: 12 VDC 20% (PNP), max. load current: 21 mA, with short-circuit protection circuit
(for driving SSR)
Linear current output *2 4 to 20 mA DC/0 to 20 mA DC, load: 500  max., resolution: approx. 10,000
E5CC: 3
Number of outputs E5CC-B: 2
E5CC-U: 1 or 2 (depends on model)
Auxiliary
output SPST-NO relay outputs, 250 VAC, Models with 1 output: 3 A (resistive load), E5CC-U models with 2
outputs: 3 A (resistive load), E5CC-B models with 2 outputs: 2 A (resistive load), Models with 3
Output specifications
outputs: 2 A (resistive load), Electrical life: 100,000 operations, Minimum applicable load: 10 mA at
5 V (reference value)
E5CC: 2 or 4 (depends on model)
Number of inputs
E5CC-B: 2 (depends on model)
Event Contact input: ON: 1 k max., OFF: 100 k min.
input *1 External contact input
Non-contact input: ON: Residual voltage: 1.5 V max., OFF: Leakage current: 0.1 mA max.
specifications
Current flow: Approx. 7 mA per contact
Number of outputs 1 (only on models with a transfer output)
Transfer
output *1 Current output: 4 to 20 mA DC, load: 500  max., resolution: approx. 10,000
Output specifications
Linear voltage output: 1 to 5 VDC, load: 1 k min., resolution: Approx. 10,000
Setting method Digital setting using front panel keys
Current input: 4 to 20 mA DC or 0 to 20 mA DC (input impedance: 150  max.)
Remote SP input *1 *2
Voltage input: 1 to 5 V, 0 to 5 V, or 0 to 10 V (input impedance: 1 M min.)
11-segment digital display and individual indicators
Indication method
Character height: PV: 15.2 mm, SV: 7.1 mm
Up to eight set points (SP0 to SP7) can be saved and selected using the event inputs, key operations,
Multi SP *3
or serial communications.
Bank switching None
Manual output, heating/cooling control, loop burnout alarm, SP ramp, other alarm functions, heater
burnout (HB) alarm (including SSR failure (HS) alarm), 40% AT, 100% AT, MV limiter, input digital
Other functions filter, self tuning, robust tuning, PV input shift, run/stop, protection functions, extraction of square root,
MV change rate limit, logic operations, temperature status display, simple programming, moving
average of input value, and display brightness setting
10 to 55C (with no condensation or icing), For 3-year warranty: 10 to 50C with standard mounting
Ambient operating temperature
(with no condensation or icing)
Ambient operating humidity 25% to 85%
Storage temperature -25 to 65°C (with no condensation or icing)
Altitude 2,000 m max.
Recommended fuse T2A, 250 VAC, time-lag, low-breaking capacity
Installation environment Overvoltage category II, Pollution Degree 2 (EN/IEC/UL 61010-1)
*1. There are no optional functions for the E5CC-U. Refer to Model Number Legend and List of Models on page 19.
*2. This function is not supported by the E5CC-B. Refer to Model Number Legend on page 18.
*3. With the E5CC-B, there can be up to four set points if event inputs are used to select them.

21
 E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U

Input Ranges
Thermocouple/Platinum Resistance Thermometer (Universal inputs)
Sensor Platinum resistance Infrared temperature
Thermocouple
type thermometer sensor
Sensor 10 to 60 to 115 to 140 to
Pt100 JPt100 K J T E L U N R S B W PLII 70°C 120°C 165°C 260°C
specification
2300
2300
1800
1800
1700 1700
1700
1600
1500
1400
1300 1300 1300
1300
Temperature range (°C)

1200
1100
1000
850 850 850
900
800
700
600
600
500.0 500.0 500.0
500
400.0 400 400.0 400 400.0
400
260
300
120 165
200
100.0 100.0 90
100
100
0
0.0 0.0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-100
-20.0 -100 -20.0 -100
-200
-200 -199.9 199.9 -200 -200 -199.9 -200 -200 -199.9 -200
Set value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Shaded settings are the default settings.

The applicable standards for the input types are as follows:

K, J, T, E, N, R, S, B: JIS C 1602-1995, IEC 60584-1 JPt100: JIS C 1604-1989, JIS C 1606-1989
L: Fe-CuNi, DIN 43710-1985 Pt100: JIS C 1604-1997, IEC 60751
U: Cu-CuNi, DIN 43710-1985 PL II: According to Platinel II electromotive force charts from BASF (previously Engelhard)
W: W5Re/W26Re, ASTM E988-1990

Analog input
Input type Current Voltage
Input
4 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA 1 to 5 V 0 to 5 V 0 to 10 V 0 to 50 mV*
specification
Usable in the following ranges by scaling:
Setting range -1999 to 9999, -199.9 to 999.9,
-19.99 to 99.99 or -1.999 to 9.999
Set value 25 26 27 28 29 30
* The range applies to the E5CC-U only for those manufactured in May 2014 or later.

22
 E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U

Alarm Types
Each alarm can be independently set to one of the following 19 alarm types. The default is 2: Upper limit. (see note.)
Auxiliary outputs are allocated for alarms. ON delays and OFF delays (0 to 999 s) can also be specified.
Note: In the default settings for models with HB or HS alarms, alarm 1 is set to a heater alarm (HA) and the Alarm Type 1 parameter is not displayed.
To use alarm 1, set the output assignment to alarm 1.

Alarm output operation

Set
Alarm type When alarm value X When alarm value X Description of function
value
is positive is negative
0 Alarm function OFF Output OFF No alarm
Set the upward deviation in the set point for the alarm upper
ON
L H limit (H) and the lower deviation in the set point for the alarm
1 Upper- and lower-limit *1 * 2
OFF
SP
PV lower limit (L). The alarm is ON when the PV is outside this
deviation range.
Set the upward deviation in the set point by setting the alarm
2 ON
X
ON
X
Upper-limit value (X). The alarm is ON when the PV is higher than the
(default) OFF
SP
PV OFF
SP
PV
SP by the deviation or more.
X X Set the downward deviation in the set point by setting the
ON ON
3 Lower-limit OFF PV OFF PV alarm value (X). The alarm is ON when the PV is lower than
SP SP
the SP by the deviation or more.
Set the upward deviation in the set point for the alarm upper
Upper- and lower-limit ON
L H limit (H) and the lower deviation in the set point for the alarm
4 * 3
range *1 OFF
SP
PV lower limit (L). The alarm is ON when the PV is inside this
deviation range.
Upper- and lower-limit with ON
L H A standby sequence is added to the upper- and lower-limit
5 *4
standby sequence *1 *5
OFF
SP
PV alarm (1). *6
Upper-limit with standby ON
X
ON
X
6 A standby sequence is added to the upper-limit alarm (2). *6
sequence OFF
SP
PV OFF
SP
PV

Lower-limit with standby ON

X
ON
X
7 A standby sequence is added to the lower-limit alarm (3). *6
sequence OFF
SP
PV OFF
SP
PV

Absolute-value upper- ON
X
ON
X The alarm will turn ON if the process value is larger than the
8
limit OFF
0
PV OFF
0
PV alarm value (X) regardless of the set point.
ON
X
ON
X The alarm will turn ON if the process value is smaller than the
9 Absolute-value lower-limit OFF
0
PV OFF
0
PV alarm value (X) regardless of the set point.
Absolute-value upper-
ON
X
ON
X A standby sequence is added to the absolute-value upper-
10 limit with standby OFF
0
PV OFF
0
PV limit alarm (8). *6
sequence
Absolute-value lower-limit ON
X
ON
X A standby sequence is added to the absolute-value lower-
11
with standby sequence OFF
0
PV OFF
0
PV limit alarm (9). *6
12 LBA (alarm 1 type only) - *7
13 PV change rate alarm - *8
SP absolute-value ON
X
ON
X This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the set point (SP)
14
upper-limit alarm OFF
0
SP OFF
0
SP is higher than the alarm value (X).
SP absolute-value ON
X
ON
X This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the set point (SP)
15
lower-limit alarm OFF
0
SP OFF
0
SP is lower than the alarm value (X).
Standard Control Standard Control
X X
ON ON
OFF MV OFF MV
0 0
MV absolute-value This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the manipulated
16 Heating/Cooling
upper-limit alarm *9 Heating/Cooling variable (MV) is higher than the alarm value (X).
Control (Heating MV) Control (Heating MV)
X
ON
OFF
0
MV Always ON
Standard Control Standard Control
X X
ON ON
OFF MV OFF MV
0 0
MV absolute-value This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the manipulated
17 Heating/Cooling Heating/Cooling
lower-limit alarm *9 variable (MV) is lower than the alarm value (X).
Control (Cooling MV) Control (Cooling MV)
X
ON
OFF
0
MV Always ON
X
RSP absolute-value ON
X ON This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the remote SP
18 OFF RSP
upper-limit alarm *10 OFF
0
RSP
0 (RSP) is higher than the alarm value (X).
RSP absolute-value ON
X
ON
X This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the remote SP
19
lower-limit alarm *10 OFF
0
RSP OFF
0
RSP (RSP) is lower than the alarm value (X).

23
 E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U

*1. With set values 1, 4 and 5, the upper and lower limit values can *4. Set value: 5, Upper- and lower-limit with standby sequence
be set independently for each alarm type, and are expressed as For Upper- and Lower-Limit Alarm Described Above *2
“L” and “H.” • Case 1 and 2
*2. Set value: 1, Upper- and lower-limit alarm Always OFF when the upper-limit and lower-limit hysteresis overlaps.
Case 1 Case 2 Case 3 (Always ON)
• Case 3: Always OFF
H<0, L<0
L H SP SP L H H SP L *5. Set value: 5, Upper- and lower-limit with standby sequence
H<0, L>0 Always OFF when the upper-limit and lower-limit hysteresis
H<0, L>0 H>0, L<0
H L SP |H| ≥ |L| overlaps.
|H| < |L| |H| > |L|
H>0, L<0 *6. Refer to the E5@C Digital Temperature Controllers User's Manual
SP H L |H| ≤ |L| (Cat. No. H174) for information on the operation of the standby
*3. Set value: 4, Upper- and lower-limit range sequence.
Case 1 Case 2 Case 3 (Always OFF)
*7. Refer to the E5@C Digital Temperature Controllers User's Manual
H<0, L<0 (Cat. No.H174) for information on the loop burnout alarm (LBA).
L H SP SP L H H SP L *8. Refer to the E5@C Digital Temperature Controllers User's Manual
H<0, L>0 H>0, L<0 H<0, L>0 (Cat. No. H174) for information on the PV change rate alarm.
|H| < |L| |H| > |L| H L SP |H| ≥ |L| *9. When heating/cooling control is performed, the MV absolute
H>0, L<0
upper limit alarm functions only for the heating operation and the
SP H L |H| ≤ |L| MV absolute lower limit alarm functions only for the cooling
operation.
*10.This value is displayed only when a remote SP input is used. It
functions in both Local SP Mode and Remote SP Mode.
Remote SP input is supported only for the E5CC.

24
 E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U

Characteristics
E5CC/E5CC-B
Thermocouple: (0.3% of indication value or 1°C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max. *1
Platinum resistance thermometer: (0.2% of indication value or 0.8°C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max.
Analog input: 0.2% FS 1 digit max.
Indication accuracy
CT input: 5% FS 1 digit max.
(at the ambient temperature of 23°C)
E5CC-U
Thermocouple: (1% of indication value or 2°C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max. *1
Platinum resistance thermometer: (0.2% of indication value or 0.8°C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max.
Analog input: 0.2% FS 1 digit max.
Transfer output accuracy 0.3% FS max.
Simple transfer output accuracy 0.3% FS max.*2
Remote SP Input Type 0.2% FS 1 digit max.
Influence of temperature *3 Thermocouple input (R, S, B, W, PL II): (1% of indication value or 10°C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max.
Other thermocouple input: (1% of indication value or 4°C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max. *4
Influence of voltage *3 Platinum resistance thermometer: (1% of indication value or 2°C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max.
Analog input: 1%FS 1 digit max.
Influence of EMS. CT input: 5% FS 1 digit max.
(at EN 61326-1) Remote SP input: 1% FS 1 digit max.
Input sampling period 50 ms
Temperature input: 0.1 to 999.9°C or °F (in units of 0.1°C or °F)
Hysteresis
Analog input: 0.01% to 99.99% FS (in units of 0.01% FS)
Temperature input: 0.1 to 999.9°C or °F (in units of 0.1°C or °F)
Proportional band (P)
Analog input: 0.1% to 999.9% FS (in units of 0.1% FS)
Integral time (I) 0 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.0 to 999.9 s (in units of 0.1 s) *5
Derivative time (D) 0 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.0 to 999.9 s (in units of 0.1 s) *5
Temperature input: 0.1 to 999.9°C or °F (in units of 0.1°C or °F)
Proportional band (P) for cooling
Analog input: 0.1% to 999.9% FS (in units of 0.1% FS)
Integral time (I) for cooling 0 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.0 to 999.9 s (in units of 0.1 s) *5
Derivative time (D) for cooling 0 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.0 to 999.9 s (in units of 0.1 s) *5
Control period 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1 to 99 s (in units of 1 s)
Manual reset value 0.0 to 100.0% (in units of 0.1%)
Alarm setting range -1999 to 9999 (decimal point position depends on input type)
Thermocouple: 0.1°C/ max. (100 max.)
Influence of signal source resistance
Platinum resistance thermometer: 0.1°C/ max. (10  max.)
Insulation resistance 20 M min. (at 500 VDC)
Dielectric strength 3,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between terminals of different charge
Malfunction 10 to 55 Hz, 20 m/s2 for 10 min each in X, Y, and Z directions
Vibration
Resistance 10 to 55 Hz, 20 m/s2 for 2 hrs each in X, Y, and Z directions
Malfunction 100 m/s2, 3 times each in X, Y, and Z directions
Shock
Resistance 300 m/s2, 3 times each in X, Y, and Z directions
E5CC/E5CC-B: Controller: Approx. 120 g, Adapter: Approx. 10 g
Weight
E5CC-U: Controller: Approx. 100 g, Adapter: Approx. 10 g
E5CC/E5CC-B: Front panel: IP66, Rear case: IP20, Terminals: IP00
Degree of protection
E5CC-U: Front panel: IP50, Rear case: IP20, Terminals: IP00
Memory protection Non-volatile memory (number of writes: 1,000,000 times)
E5CC: CX-Thermo version 4.5 or higher
Setup Tool E5CC-B: CX-Thermo version 4.65 or higher
E5CC-U: CX-Thermo version 4.61 or higher
E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U top panel: An E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable is used to connect
Setup Tool port
to a USB port on the computer. *6
*1. The indication accuracy of K thermocouples in the -200 to 1,300°C range, T and N thermocouples at a temperature of -100°C max., and U and
L thermocouples at any temperatures is 2°C 1 digit max. The indication accuracy of the B thermocouple at a temperature of 400°C max. is
not specified. The indication accuracy of B thermocouples at a temperature of 400 to 800°C is 3°C max. The indication accuracy of the R and
S thermocouples at a temperature of 200°C max. is 3°C 1 digit max. The indication accuracy of W thermocouples is (0.3% of PV or 3°C,
whichever is greater) 1 digit max. The indication accuracy of PL II thermocouples is (0.3% of PV or 2°C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max.
*2. However, the precision between 0 and 4 mA for a 0 to 20 mA output is 1% FS max.
*3. Ambient temperature: -10°C to 23°C to 55°C, Voltage range: -15% to 10% of rated voltage
*4. K thermocouple at -100°C max.: 10°C max.
*5. The unit is determined by the setting of the Integral/Derivative Time Unit parameter.
*6. External communications (RS-485) and USB-serial conversion cable communications can be used at the same time.

25
 E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U

cULus: UL 61010-1/CSA C22.2 No.61010-1 *7, KOSHA (S Mark) certification (Some models only.) *8,
Approved standards
Standards Korean wireless regulations (Radio law: KC Mark) (Some models only.) *8, Lloyd's standards *9
Conformed standards EN 61010-1 (IEC 61010-1)
EMI: EN 61326-1 *10
Radiated Interference Electromagnetic Field Strength: EN 55011 Group 1, class A
Noise Terminal Voltage: EN 55011 Group 1, class A
EMS: EN 61326-1 *10
ESD Immunity: EN 61000-4-2
EMC
Electromagnetic Field Immunity: EN 61000-4-3
Burst Noise Immunity: EN 61000-4-4
Conducted Disturbance Immunity: EN 61000-4-6
Surge Immunity: EN 61000-4-5
Voltage Dip/Interrupting Immunity: EN 61000-4-11
*7. The E5CC-U plug-in model is certified for UL listing only when used together with the OMRON P2CF-11 or P2CF-11-E Socket. The P3GA-11
is not certified for UL listing.
*8. Access the following website for information on certified models. http://www.ia.omron.com/support/models/index.html
*9. Refer to information on maritime standards in Shipping Standards on page 110 for compliance with Lloyd's Standards.
*10.Industrial electromagnetic environment (EN/IEC 61326-1 Table 2)

26
 E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U

USB-Serial Conversion Cable When Digital Temperature Controllers are

connected, set points and RUN/STOP
Applicable OS Windows XP/Vista/7/8/10 *1 commands can be sent from the Digital
CX-Thermo version 4.5 or higher Temperature Controller that is set as the
(Version 4.61 or higher is required for the Component
Applicable software master to the Digital Temperature
E5CC-U, Version 4.65 or higher is required Communications *1
Controllers that are set as slaves.
for the E5CC-B.) Slope and offsets can be set for the set point.
Applicable models E5@C-T Series, E5@C Series, and E5CB Series Number of connected Digital Temperature
USB interface standard Conforms to USB Specification 2.0. Controllers: 32 max. (including master)
DTE speed 38400 bps When Digital Temperature Controllers are
Computer: USB (type A plug) connected, the parameters can be copied
Connector Copying *2 from the Digital Temperature Controller that is
Digital Temperature Controller:
specifications set as the master to the Digital Temperature
Special serial connector
Controllers that are set as slaves.
Power supply Bus power (Supplied from USB host controller.)*2
MELSEC is a registered trademark of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.
Power supply voltage 5 VDC
KEYENCE is a registered trademark of Keyence Corporation.
Current consumption 450 mA max. *1. A Temperature Controller with version 1.1 or higher is required.
4.70.2 VDC A Temperature Controller with version 2.1 or higher is required for
Output voltage (Supplied from USB-Serial Conversion Cable the FX Series or the KV Series.
to the Digital Temperature Controller.) *2. Both the programless communications and the component
250 mA max. communications support the copying.
Output current (Supplied from USB-Serial Conversion Cable
to the Digital Temperature Controller.) Current Transformer (Order Separately) Ratings
Ambient operating
0 to 55°C (with no condensation or icing) Dielectric strength 1,000 VAC for 1 min
temperature
Ambient operating humidity 10% to 80% Vibration resistance 50 Hz, 98 m/s2
Storage temperature -20 to 60°C (with no condensation or icing) E54-CT1: Approx. 11.5 g,
Weight
Storage humidity 10% to 80% E54-CT3: Approx. 50 g
Altitude 2,000 m max. Accessories Armatures (2)
(E54-CT3 only) Plugs (2)
Weight Approx. 120 g
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and or other countries. Heater Burnout Alarms and SSR Failure Alarms
*1. CX-Thermo version 4.65 or higher runs on Windows 10. Models with detection for single-phase
*2. Use a high-power port for the USB port. CT input (for heater heaters: One input
Note: A driver must be installed on the computer. Refer to the Instruction current detection) Models with detection for singlephase or
Manual included with the Cable for the installation procedure. three-phase heaters: Two inputs
Maximum heater current 50 A AC
Communications Specifications Input current
Transmission line 5% FS 1 digit max.
RS-485: Multidrop indication accuracy
connection method Heater burnout alarm 0.1 to 49.9 A (in units of 0.1 A)
Communications RS-485 (two-wire, half duplex) setting range *1 Minimum detection ON time: 100 ms *3
Synchronization method Start-stop synchronization SSR failure alarm 0.1 to 49.9 A (in units of 0.1 A)
Protocol CompoWay/F, or Modbus setting range *2 Minimum detection OFF time: 100 ms *4
Baud rate * 9600, 19200, 38400, or 57600 bps *1. For heater burnout alarms, the heater current will be measured
Transmission code ASCII when the control output is ON, and the output will turn ON if the
Data bit length * 7 or 8 bits heater current is lower than the set value (i.e., heater burnout
detection current value).
Stop bit length * 1 or 2 bits
*2. For SSR failure alarms, the heater current will be measured when the
Vertical parity (none, even, odd) control output is OFF, and the output will turn ON if the heater current
Error detection Block check character (BCC) with is higher than the set value (i.e., SSR failure detection current value).
CompoWay/F or CRC-16 Modbus *3. The value is 30 ms for a control period of 0.1 s or 0.2 s.
Flow control None *4. The value is 35 ms for a control period of 0.1 s or 0.2 s.
Interface RS-485
Retry function None Electrical Life Expectancy Curve for
Communications buffer 217 bytes
Communications 0 to 99 ms
Relays (Reference Values)
500
Life (× 104 operations)

response wait time Default: 20 ms

300
* The baud rate, data bit length, stop bit length, and vertical parity can
be individually set using the Communications Setting Level.
100
Communications Functions
50
You can use the memory in the PLC to read and write
E5@C parameters, start and stop operation, etc. The 30
E5@C automatically performs communications with
PLCs. No communications programming is required.
Number of connected Digital Temperature 10
Controllers: 32 max. (Up to 16 for the FX Series)
5
Applicable PLCs E5CC/E5CC-B
Programless 250 VAC, 30 VDC
OMRON PLCs 3
communications *1 CS Series, CJ Series, or (resistive load)
cosφ = 1
CP Series
Mitsubishi Electric PLCs 1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
MELSEC Q Series, L Series, or FX Series
(compatible with the FX2 or FX3 (excluding the FX1S)) Switching current (A)
KEYENCE PLCs
KEYENCE KV Series

27
 E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U
External Connections
E5CC (Screw Terminal)
Control output 1
Relay output
250 VAC, 3A
E5CC-@@ 3 @ 5 M - @ @ @
(resistive load) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
Voltage output ↑
(for driving SSR) Auxiliary outputs 1, 2, 3 Terminal type
12 VDC, 21 mA Control output 2 Relay outputs
Linear current output Models with 3 auxiliary
0 to 20 mA DC Voltage output The E5CC is set for a K-type thermocouple (input type = 5) by
(for driving SSR) outputs: 250 VAC, 2 A default. An input error (s.err) will occur if the input type setting does
4 to 20 mA DC
Load: 500 Ω max. 12 VDC, 21 mA (resistive load) not agree with the temperature sensor. Check the input type.

(1) Control outputs 1, 2

RX QX CX QQ CQ
Models with Models with 1 Models with Models with 2 Models with 2 Outputs: Linear Current (2) Auxiliary Outputs
1 Relay Voltage Output 1 Linear Voltage Outputs Output and Voltage (for Driving SSR) Auxiliary outputs 1, 2, 3
Output (for Driving SSR) Current Output (for Driving SSR)
OUT1 1 OUT1 OUT1 1 OUT1 1 OUT1 7
1 + 1 + +Q +C Auxiliary output 3
R - Q - C 2 2 8
2 2 2 - Q - Q Auxiliary output 2
3 3 3 3 + OUT2 3 + OUT2 9
Auxiliary output 1
10 ● ●

1 13 7
2 14 8
3 15 9
(5) Sensor (Temperature/Analog) Input (3) Input Power Supply
4 16 10
TC Pt I V 100 to 240 VAC 24 VAC/DC
A + 4 5 17 11
4 4 4
B mA 6 18 12 11 11
- 5 5 5 - 5
B - V 12 12
+ 6 6 6
+
6
(no polarity)
(6) Options
001 003 004 005 006 007
Event Inputs 1 Communications Communications Event Inputs Event Inputs Event Inputs
and 2, and CT1 (RS-485), CT1, (RS-485), and 1 to 4 1 and 2, and 1 and 2, and
and CT2 Event Inputs 3 and 4 Transfer Output Remote SP Input
(-) B(+) B(+)
13 13 13 (-) 13 (-) 13 (-) 13
RS-485 RS-485
EV1
14 14 14 14 14 14
A(-) A(-) EV1 EV1 EV1
EV2 15 15 15 EV2
15 EV2
15 EV2
15
16 16 (-) 16 (-) 16 16 + + 16
CT1 CT1 + V V +
17 COM 17 EV3
17 17 17 mA 17
CT2 EV3 I
18 18 EV4 18 EV4
18 18 - - 18

Use no-voltage inputs for the event inputs.

The polarity for non-contact inputs is given in parentheses.

Note: 1. The application of the terminals depends on the model.

2. Do not wire the terminals that are shown with a gray background.
3. When complying with EMC standards, the cable that connects the sensor must be 30 m or less.
If the cable length exceeds 30 m, compliance with EMC standards will not be possible.
4. Connect M3 crimped terminals.

28
 E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U

E5CC-B (Push-In Plus Terminal)

E5CC-@@ 2 @ B M - @ @ @
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
Control output 1 ↑
Relay output Terminal type
250 VAC, 3A
(resistive load) Auxiliary outputs 1, 2 The E5CC is set for a K-type thermocouple
Voltage output Relay outputs (input type = 5) by default. An input error
(for driving SSR) outputs: 250 VAC, 2 A (s.err) will occur if the input type setting does
12 VDC, 21 mA (resistive load) not agree with the temperature sensor. Check
the input type.

(1) Control outputs 1

RX QX
Models with Models with 1
1 Relay Voltage Output
Output (for Driving SSR) (2) Auxiliary Outputs

1 OUT1 1 OUT1 1 17 9
+
R - Q 9
2 2 2 18 10 Auxiliary output 2
3 19 11 10
*
4 20 12
11
(5) Sensor (Temperature/Analog) Input 5 21 13 Auxiliary output 1
TC Pt I V 6 22 14 12
A + 6
6 6 6 7 23 15
- 7 B mA - 7
7 7 8 24 16
B - V (3) Input Power Supply
+ 8 8 8
+
8
100 to 240 VAC 24 VAC/DC

(6) Options 13 13
* *
001 002 004 006 14 14
Event Inputs 1 Communications Communications Event Inputs
and 2, and CT1 (RS-485), CT1 (RS-485), and 1 and 2, and 15 15
Event Inputs 3 and 4 Transfer Output * *
16 16
(-) B(+) B(+) (-)
17 17 17 17 (no polarity)
(-) * * * (-) *
18 RS-485 18 RS-485 18 18

EV1
19 19 19 EV1
19
A(-) * A(-) *
20 20 20 20
EV2 EV2
(-)
21 21 21 21
CT1 CT1 (-) * +
22 22 22 22
+ V Transfer
23 23 23 23
EV3 I Output
24 24 24 24 -
EV4

Use no-voltage inputs for the event inputs.

The polarity for non-contact inputs is given in parentheses.

Note: 1. The application of the terminals depends on the model.

2. Do not wire the terminals that are shown with a gray background.
3. When complying with EMC standards, the cable that connects the sensor must be 30 m or less.
If the cable length exceeds 30 m, compliance with EMC standards will not be possible.
4. Refer to Wiring Precautions for E5@C-B (Controllers with Push-In Plus Terminal) on page 116 for wire specifications and wiring methods.
5. Common terminals are indicated with asterisks (*). You can use the input power supply and communications common terminals for
crossover wiring. Do not exceed the maximum number of Temperature Controllers given below if you use crossover wiring for the input
power supply.
100 to 240 VAC Controllers: 16 max.
24 VAC/VDC Controllers: 8 max.

Wiring Example:
13
14
15
16

To another E5@C

29
 E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U

E5CC-U (Plug-in Models)

The E5CC-U is set for a K-type thermocouple (input type =

E5CC-UM-000
5) by default. An input error (s.err) will occur if the input Control output 1
type setting does not agree with the temperature sensor.
Check the input type. Auxiliary outputs 1, 2
Relay output
250 VAC, 3 A (resistive load)

Control output 1
Auxiliary output 1
I Auxiliary output 2:
Pt
+ A Control output (cooling
mA V TC
− − B
− V
+ + Input power supply
B

Sensor (temperature/analog) input • 100 to 240 VAC

• 24 VAC/DC (no polarity)
Control output 1
Voltage output (for driving SSR) Control output 1:
12 VDC, 21 mA QX CX RW
Linear current output Models with 1 Models with 1 Models with 1
4 to 20 mA DC Voltage Output Linear Current Relay Output
0 to 20 mA DC (for Driving SSR) Output
Load: 500 Ω max. − − Output 1
Relay output (three terminals used) Output 1 Output 1 R
SPDT, 250 VAC, 3 A Q C
(resistive load) + +

Note: 1. The application of the terminals depends on the model.

2. Do not wire the terminals that are shown with a gray background.
3. When complying with EMC standards, the cable that connects the sensor must be 30 m or less.
If the cable length exceeds 30 m, compliance with EMC standards will not be possible.
4. Connect M3.5 crimped terminals.

Isolation/Insulation Block Diagrams

E5CC E5CC-U
Models with 3 Auxiliary Outputs Models with 2 Auxiliary Outputs

Sensor input, CT inputs, and remote SP input Sensor input

Communications and event inputs Voltage output (for driving SSR) and linear current output
Power
Power Voltage output (for driving SSR), supply
supply linear current output, and transfer output Relay output

Auxiliary outputs 1 and 2

Relay output

Auxiliary outputs 1, 2, 3
: Reinforced insulation

: Functional isolation
: Reinforced insulation

: Functional isolation

Note: Auxiliary outputs 1 to 3 are not insulated.

E5CC-B
Models with 2 Auxiliary Outputs

Sensor input and CT input

Communications and event inputs

Power
supply Voltage output (for driving SSR) and transfer output

Relay output

Auxiliary outputs 1, 2

: Reinforced insulation

: Functional isolation

30
 E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U
Nomenclature
E5CC Front panel
E5CC-B Temperature unit Top View of E5CC Top View of E5CC-B Top View of E5CC-U

E5CC-U Operation indicators No. 1 display

PV or specified parameter

No. 2 display

SP or specified parameter value

Use the U D Keys to set the

parameter.

Top-panel Setup Tool port

Press O Key once to go to Adjustment Level.
Use S Key to change the digit (default setting).
Press O Key for at least 3 seconds to go to Initial Setting Level.
Use the M Key to change to another parameter.

Dimensions (Unit: mm)

Controllers
E5CC
73.1
4
60
48 × 48 1 44.8 × 44.8

44.8 × 44.8 48.8 58

Waterproof Packing Mounting Adapter

(Accessory) (Accessory)
Terminal Cover
(E53-COV17)
(Sold separately)

E5CC-B (71.4)
4
67.4
(1)
48 × 48 44.8 × 44.8

44.8 × 44.8 58

Waterproof Packing Mounting Adapter

(Accessory) (Accessory)

The Setup Tool port is on the top of the Temperature Controller.

It is used to connect the Temperature Controller to the computer to use the Setup Tool.
The E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable is required to make the connection.
Refer to the instructions that are provided with the USB-Serial Conversion Cable for the connection procedure.
Note: Do not leave the USB-Serial Conversion Cable connected when you use the Temperature Controller.

Panel Cutout
Mounted Separately Group Mounted
(48 × number of units - 2.5)+1.0
0

• Recommended panel thickness is 1 to 5 mm.

45+0.6
0 • Group mounting is not possible in the vertical direction. (Maintain
the specified mounting space between Controllers.)
• To mount the Controller so that it is waterproof, insert the water-
60 min.
proof packing onto the Controller.
• When two or more Controllers are mounted, make sure that the
45+0.6
0 surrounding temperature does not exceed the allowable operating
temperature specified in the specifications.
• Use a control panel thickness of 1 to 3 mm if the Y92A-48N and a
45+0.6
0 USB-Serial Conversion Cable are used together.

31
 E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U

E5CC-U 76.8
4 14.2
48 × 48 58.6
44.8 × 44.8

58

Mounting Adapter
(Accessory)

The Setup Tool port is on the top of the Temperature Controller.

It is used to connect the Temperature Controller to the computer to use the Setup Tool.
The E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable is required to make the connection.
Refer to the instructions that are provided with the USB-Serial Conversion Cable for the connection procedure.
Note: Do not leave the USB-Serial Conversion Cable connected when you use the Temperature Controller.
Panel Cutout
Mounted Separately Group Mounted
(48 × number of units - 2.5)+1.0
0

• Recommended panel thickness is 1 to 5 mm.

45+0.6
0 • Group mounting is not possible in the vertical direction. (Maintain
the specified mounting space between Controllers.)
60 min. • When two or more Controllers are mounted, make sure that the
surrounding temperature does not exceed the allowable operating
temperature specified in the specifications.
45+0.6
0
• Use a control panel thickness of 1 to 3 mm if the Y92A-48N and a
USB-Serial Conversion Cable are used together.
45+0.6
0

Accessories (Order Separately)

USB-Serial Conversion Cable
E58-CIFQ2 (2110)
250 263 1510

LED (RD)

USB connector
(type A plug) Serial connector
LED (PWR)

LED (SD)

Terminal Covers 48 Terminal Covers

E53-COV17 E53-COV23 (Three Covers provided.)
2 3.8
48.8

10

Terminal Cover
(E53-COV23)
22 44.8

9.1

Terminal Cover (for the P3GA-11 Back-connecting Socket)

Y92A-48G Twelve, 6.4-dia.

34 Y92A-48G
UP 47.7×47.7 48×48

P C

16.5
24.6 27.6

Note: You can attach the P3GA-11 Back-connecting Socket for finger protection.
47.4

32
 E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U

Waterproof Packing The Waterproof Packing is provided only with the E5CC/E5CC-B.
Y92S-P8 (for DIN 48  48) It is not included with the E5CC-U.
Order the Waterproof Packing separately if it becomes lost or damaged.
The Waterproof Packing can be used to achieve an IP66 degree of protection.
(Deterioration, shrinking, or hardening of the waterproof packing may occur depending on the
operating environment. Therefore, periodic replacement is recommended to ensure the level of
waterproofing specified in IP66. The time for periodic replacement depends on the operating
environment. Be sure to confirm this point at your site.
Consider three years as a rough standard.)
The E5CC-U cannot be waterproofed even if the Waterproof Packing is attached.

Current Transformers
E54-CT1 Thru-current (Io) vs. Output Voltage (Eo)
21
2.8
15 (Reference Values)
5.8 dia.
E54-CT1
7.5
Maximum continuous heater current: 50 A (50/60 Hz)
Number of windings: 4002
25 3
Winding resistance: 182 
10.5
100V

Output voltage (Eo) V (r.m.s.)

Frequency: 50 Hz
40
10 ∞ Distortion
Two, 3.5 dia. factor
1kΩ
10%
10 1
3%
1%
30 100mV

10 100Ω
E54-CT3
2.36 dia.
30 RL=10Ω
1
12 dia.
9
100μV

10
40 × 40 1 10 100mA 1 10 100 1,000A
Thru-current (Io) A (r.m.s.)

Thru-current (Io) vs. Output Voltage (Eo)

Two, M3 (depth: 4) (Reference Values)
15
E54-CT3
Maximum continuous heater current: 120 A (50/60 Hz)
30 (Maximum continuous heater current for an OMRON Dig-
ital Temperature Controller is 50 A.)
Number of windings: 400±2
E54-CT3 Accessories
Winding resistance: 8±0.8 
• Armature Connection Example
100V
Output voltage (Eo) V (r.m.s.)

Frequency: 50 Hz
Armature Distortion
Approx. 3 dia. Plug ∞
10 factor
1kΩ
10%
Lead 500Ω 3%
1 1%

100mV
18
100Ω
50Ω
• Plug 10
RL=10Ω

1
Approx. 6 dia.

100μV
(22)
10
1 10 100mA 1 10 100 1,000A
Thru-current (Io) A (r.m.s.)

33
 E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U

Adapter
Y92F-45 Note: 1. Use this Adapter when the Front Panel has already been prepared for the E5B@.
2. Only black is available.
3. You cannot use the E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable if you use the Y92F-45 Adapter. To use the USB-Serial
Conversion Cable to make the settings, do so before you mount the Temperature Controller in the panel.
4. You cannot use it together with the Y92F-49 Adapter that is enclosed with the Controller.

Fixture (Accessory)
4.7 76
69.6 to 77.6
72 × 72

67 × 67 87

Mounted to E5CC Panel (1 to 8 mm) Mounting Adapter

72 × 72 Y92F-30
(Accessory)

48 × 48

2.2 4.7
62.8
To back of the E5CC

DIN Track Mounting Adapter

Y92F-52 Note: This Adapter cannot be used together with the Terminal Cover.
Remove the Terminal Cover to use the Adapter.

This Adapter is used to mount the

E5CC to a DIN Track.
61
If you use the Adapter, there is no
need for a plate to mount in the
panel or to drill mounting holes in
3.5 the panel.
50 38

Mounted to E5CC

48

80.5

34
 E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U

Watertight Cover Mounting Adapter

Y92A-48N Y92F-49
21.9 14
The Mounting Adapter is provided with the
(2)
Temperature Controller.
Order this Adapter separately if it becomes
lost or damaged.

87.7 69
79.2

12

67.6

Protective Cover Protective Cover

Y92A-48D Note: This Protective Cover cannot be used Y92A-48H
if the Waterproof Packing is installed. This Protective Cover is hard type.
This Protective Cover is soft type. Please use it for the mis-operation
It is able to operate the controller with using prevention etc.
this cover.

E5CC-U Wiring Socket

Front-connecting Socket
P2CF-11
Eleven, M3.5 × 7.5 3 4.5 Terminal Layout/Internal Connections
sems screws 7.8 (Top View)

8 7 6 5 Mounting Holes
4
Two, 4.5 dia. mounting holes
70 max. 35.4
Two,
4.5-dia. 9 3 40±0.2
holes
10 11 1 2 Note: Can also be mounted
to a DIN track
4 50 max. 31.2 max.
Note: 1. A model with finger protection (P2CF-11-E) is also available.
2. You cannot use the P2CF-11 or P2CF-11-E together with the Y92F-45.

Back-connecting Socket
P3GA-11
Eleven, M3.5 Terminal Layout/Internal Connections
sems screws
27dia. 4 7 3 (Bottom View)
5 6 7 8
4
45 25.6
3 9
2 1 11 10

45
4.5 16.3 6.2
6
8.7

Note: 1. Using any other sockets will adversely affect accuracy. Use only the specified sockets.
2. A Protective Cover for finger protection (Y92A-48G) is also available.
3. You cannot use the P3GA-11 together with the Y92F-45.

35
 Digital Temperature Controller

E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC (48  96 mm/96  96 mm)

Large White PV Display That’s Easier to Read. *

Easy to Use, from Model Selection to (E5EC/AC) (E5EC-B)

* CSA conformance evaluation by UL.
Setup and Operation.
Models with Push-In Plus Terminal
Added to 48 × 96-mm Lineup.
• A white LCD PV display with a height of approx. 18 mm for the
E5EC/E5EC-B and 25 mm for the E5AC improves visibility.
• High-speed sampling at 50 ms.
• With 48 x 96-mm Controllers, you can select between screw
terminal or Push-In Plus terminal to save wiring work.
• Short body with depth of only 60 mm. (Screw Terminal) 48  96 mm
• Easy connections to a PLC with programless communications. E5EC 96  96 mm
E5AC
Use component communications to link Temperature Controllers
to each other. Refer to your OMRON website for the most recent
• Tool ports are provided both on the top panel and the front panel. information on applicable safety standards.
Set up the Controller without wiring the power supply by Refer to Safety Precautions on page 108.
connecting to the computer with a Communications Conversion
Cable (sold separately). Setup is easy with the CX-Thermo (sold separately).

Main I/O Functions

Sensor Input
E5EC/E5EC-B E5AC
Universal input
• Thermocouple
• Pt
• Analog current/voltage Three-level Display
PV, SV, and MV displayed 4-digit
at the same time. displays
Indication Accuracy
• Thermocouple input: Control Output 1
±0.3% of PV <E5EC/E5AC> <E5EC-B>
• Pt input: ±0.2% of PV • Relay output • Relay output
• Analog input: ±0.2% of FS • Voltage output • Voltage output
(for driving SSR) (for driving SSR)
Sampling Period • Linear current output
• 50 ms
Control Output 2
<E5EC/E5AC> <E5EC-B>
Event Inputs • Voltage output • None
(for driving SSR)
• None • Relay output
• PF (shift) Key
•2 • Linear current output
• Setup Tool port on front panel
•4
• Temperature status display
•6
• Simple programming Auxiliary Outputs
Remote SP Input • Independent heating and <E5EC/E5AC> <E5EC-B>
cooling PID control •4 •2
• None • Changed parameter display •4
•1 • Display brightness setting
Transfer Output
Serial Communications
• None
• None
•1
• RS-485

This datasheet is provided as a guideline for selecting products.

Be sure to refer to the following manuals for application precautions and other information required for operation before attempting
to use the product.
E5@C Digital Temperature Controllers User’s Manual (Cat. No. H174)
E5@C Digital Temperature Controllers Communications Manual (Cat. No. H175)

36
 E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC
Model Number Legend and Standard Models
Model Number Legend
Models with Screw Terminal
E5EC-@@ 4 @ 5 M -@@@ (Example: E5EC-RX4A5M-000)
     
A B C D E F
E5AC-@@ 4 @ 5 M -@@@ (Example: E5AC-RX4A5M-000)
     
A B C D E F

A B C D E F
Model No. of Power Meaning
Control outputs Terminal Input
auxiliary supply Options
1 and 2 type type
outputs voltage
E5EC 48  96 mm
E5AC 96  96 mm
Control output 1 Control output 2
RX Relay output None
Voltage output
QX None
(for driving SSR)
*2 CX Linear current output None
Voltage output Voltage output
QQ
(for driving SSR) (for driving SSR)
Voltage output
QR Relay output
(for driving SSR)
RR Relay output Relay output
Linear current
*2 CC Linear current output
output
Voltage output
*2 CQ Linear current output
(for driving SSR)
Position-
PR Position-proportional relay output proportional relay
output
4 (auxiliary outputs 1 and 2 with same common and
*3 4
auxiliary outputs 3 and 4 with same common)
A 100 to 240 VAC
D 24 VAC/DC
5 Screw terminal (with cover)
Control outputs 1 and 2 M Universal input
For RX,
QX, QQ, For CX or HB alarm
For PR Event Remote Transfer
QR, RR, or CC and Communications
inputs SP Input output
CQ HS alarm
Selectable Selectable Selectable 000 --- --- --- --- ---
Option Selectable Selectable 004 --- RS-485 2 --- ---
selection Selectable 005 --- --- 4 --- ---
conditions 2
*1 Selectable 009 (for 3-phase RS-485 2 --- ---
heaters)
Selectable 010 1 --- 4 --- ---
Selectable 011 1 --- 6 Provided. Provided.
Selectable 013 --- --- 6 Provided. Provided.
Selectable Selectable 014 --- RS-485 4 Provided. Provided.
*1. The options that can be selected depend on the type of control output.
*2. The control output cannot be used as a transfer output.
*3. A model with four auxiliary outputs must be selected.
Note: Draw-out-type models of the E5EC and E5AC are available. Ask your OMRON representative for details.

Heating and Cooling Control

Using Heating and Cooling Control
A Control Output Assignment
If there is no control output 2, an auxiliary output is used as the cooling control output.
If there is a control output 2, the two control outputs are used for heating and cooling.
(It does not matter which output is used for heating and which output is used for cooling.)
B Control
If PID control is used, you can set PID control separately for heating and cooling.
This allows you to handle control systems with different heating and cooling response characteristics.

37
 E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC

Model Number Legend

Models with Push-In Plus Terminal
E5EC-@@ @ @ B M -@@@ (Example: E5EC-RX4ABM-000)
     
A B C D E F

A B C D E F
Model Control No. of Power Meaning
Terminal
outputs auxiliary supply Input type Options
type
1 and 2 outputs voltage
E5EC 48  96 mm
Control output 1 Control output 2
RX Relay output None
Voltage output
QX None
(for driving SSR)
2 2 independent points
4 (auxiliary outputs 1 and 2 with same common and auxiliary
4
outputs 3 and 4 with same common)
A 100 to 240 VAC
D 24 VAC/DC
B Push-in plus terminal
M Universal input
HB alarm
Event Remote Transfer
and Communications
inputs SP Input output
HS alarm
000 --- --- --- --- ---
008 1 RS-485 2 --- ---
010 1 --- 4 --- ---
011 1 --- 6 Provided. Provided.

Heating and Cooling Control

Using Heating and Cooling Control
A Control Output Assignment
An auxiliary output is used as the cooling control output.
B Control
If PID control is used, you can set PID control separately for heating and cooling.
This allows you to handle control systems with different heating and cooling response characteristics.

38
 E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC

Optional Products (Order Separately)

USB-Serial Conversion Cable Current Transformers (CTs)
Model Hole diameter Model
E58-CIFQ2 5.8 mm E54-CT1
12.0 mm E54-CT3
Communications Conversion Cable
Model CX-Thermo Support Software
E58-CIFQ2-E Model
Note: Always use this product together with the E58-CIFQ2. EST2-2C-MV4
This Cable is used to connect to the front-panel Setup Tool Note: CX-Thermo version 4.5 or higher is required for the E5EC/
port. E5AC.
CX-Thermo version 4.65 or higher is required for the E5EC-B.
Terminal Covers (for E5EC/E5AC) For the system requirements for the CX-Thermo, refer to
Model information on the EST2-2C-MV4 on the OMRON website
(www.ia.omron.com).
E53-COV24 (3pcs)
Note: The Terminal Covers E53-COV24 are provided with the Digital
Temperature Controller.
Waterproof Packing
Applicable Controller Model
E5EC/E5EC-B Y92S-P9
E5AC Y92S-P10
Note: This Waterproof Packing is provided with the Digital
Temperature Controller.

Waterproof Cover
Applicable Controller Model
E5EC/E5EC-B Y92A-49N
E5AC Y92A-96N

Front Port Cover

Model
Y92S-P7
Note: This Front Port Cover is provided with the Digital Temperature
Controller.

Mounting Adapter
Model
Y92F-51 (2pcs)
Note: This Mounting Adapter is provided with the Digital Temperature
Controller.

39
 E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC
Specifications
Ratings
A in model number: 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Power supply voltage
D in model number: 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz; 24 VDC
Operating voltage range 85 to 110% of rated supply voltage
Models with option selection of 000: 6.6 VA max. at 100 to 240 VAC, and 4.1 VA max. at 24 VAC or
E5EC/
2.3 W max. at 24 VDC
E5EC-B
All other models: 8.3 VA max. at 100 to 240 VAC, and 5.5 VA max. at 24 VAC or 3.2 W max. at 24 VDC
Power consumption
Models with option selection of 000: 7.0 VA max. at 100 to 240 VAC, and 4.2 VA max. at 24 VAC or
E5AC 2.4 W max. at 24 VDC
All other models: 9.0 VA max. at 100 to 240 VAC, and 5.6 VA max. at 24 VAC or 3.4 W max. at 24 VDC
Temperature input
Thermocouple: K, J, T, E, L, U, N, R, S, B, W, or PL II
Platinum resistance thermometer: Pt100 or JPt100
Sensor input Infrared temperature sensor (ES1B): 10 to 70°C, 60 to 120°C, 115 to 165°C, or 140 to 260°C
Analog input
Current input: 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 20 mA
Voltage input: 1 to 5 V, 0 to 5 V, or 0 to 10 V
Current input: 150  max., Voltage input: 1 M min.
Input impedance
(Use a 1:1 connection when connecting the ES2-HB/THB.)
Control method ON/OFF or 2-PID control (with auto-tuning)
SPST-NO, 250 VAC, 5 A (resistive load), electrical life: 100,000 operations,
Relay output
minimum applicable load: 5 V, 10 mA (reference value)
Control
Voltage output Output voltage: 12 VDC 20% (PNP), max. load current: 40 mA, with short-circuit protection circuit
output
(for driving SSR) (The maximum load current is 21 mA for models with two control outputs.)
Linear current output * 4 to 20 mA DC/0 to 20 mA DC, load: 500  max., resolution: approx. 10,000
E5EC/E5AC: 4
Number of outputs
E5EC-B: 2 or 4 (depends on model)
Auxiliary
output SPST-NO. relay outputs, 250 VAC, Models with 2 outputs: 3 A (resistive load),
Output specifications Models with 4 outputs: 2 A (resistive load),
Electrical life: 100,000 operations, Minimum applicable load: 10 mA at 5 V (reference value)
Number of inputs 2, 4 or 6 (depends on model)
Contact input: ON: 1 k max., OFF: 100 k min.
Event input External contact input
Non-contact input: ON: Residual voltage: 1.5 V max., OFF: Leakage current: 0.1 mA max.
specifications
Current flow: Approx. 7 mA per contact
Number of outputs 1 (only on models with a transfer output)
Transfer
output Current output: 4 to 20 mA DC, Load: 500  max., Resolution: Approx. 10,000
Output specifications
Linear voltage output: 1 to 5 VDC, load: 1 k min., Resolution: Approx. 10,000
Current input: 4 to 20 mA DC or 0 to 20 mA DC (input impedance: 150  max.)
Remote SP input
Voltage input: 1 to 5 V, 0 to 5 V, or 0 to 10 V (input impedance: 1 M min.)
Potentiometer input * 100  to 10 k
Setting method Digital setting using front panel keys
11-segment digital display and individual indicators
Character height: E5EC/E5EC-B: PV: 18.0 mm, SV: 11.0 mm, MV: 7.8 mm
Indication method E5AC: PV: 25.0 mm, SV: 15.0 mm, MV: 9.5 mm
Three displays Contents: PV/SV/MV, PV/SV/Multi-SP, or PV/SV/Remaining soak time, etc
Numbers of digits: 4 digits each for PM, SV, and MV displays
Up to eight set points (SP0 to SP7) can be saved and selected using the event inputs, key operations,
Multi SP
or serial communications.
Bank switching None
Manual output, heating/cooling control, loop burnout alarm, SP ramp, other alarm functions, heater
burnout (HB) alarm (including SSR failure (HS) alarm), 40% AT, 100% AT, MV limiter, input digital
Other functions filter, self tuning, robust tuning, PV input shift, run/stop, protection functions, extraction of square root,
MV change rate limit, logic operations, temperature status display, simple programming, moving
average of input value, and display brightness setting
10 to 55C (with no condensation or icing), For 3-year warranty: 10 to 50C with standard mounting
Ambient operating temperature
(with no condensation or icing)
Ambient operating humidity 25 to 85%
Storage temperature -25 to 65°C (with no condensation or icing)
Altitude 2,000 m max.
Recommended fuse T2A, 250 VAC, time-lag, low-breaking capacity
Installation environment Overvoltage category II, Pollution Degree 2 (EN/IEC/UL 61010-1)
* This function is not supported by the E5EC-B. Refer to Model Number Legend on page 38.

40
 E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC

Input Ranges
Thermocouple/Platinum Resistance Thermometer (Universal inputs)
Sensor Platinum resistance Infrared temperature
Thermocouple
type thermometer sensor
Sensor 10 to 60 to 115 to 140 to
Pt100 JPt100 K J T E L U N R S B W PLII 70°C 120°C 165°C 260°C
specification
2300
2300
1800
1800
1700 1700
1700
1600
1500
1400
Temperature range (°C)

1300 1300 1300

1300
1200
1100
1000
850 850 850
900
800
700
600
600
500.0 500.0 500.0
500
400.0 400 400.0 400 400.0
400
260
300
120 165
200
100.0 100.0 90
100
100
0.0 0.0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-100
-20.0 -100 -20.0 -100
-200
-200 -199.9 -199.9 -200 -200 -199.9 -200 -200 -199.9 -200
Set value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Shaded settings are the default settings.

The applicable standards for the input types are as follows:

K, J, T, E, N, R, S, B: JIS C 1602-1995, IEC 60584-1 JPt100: JIS C 1604-1989, JIS C 1606-1989
L: Fe-CuNi, DIN 43710-1985 Pt100: JIS C 1604-1997, IEC 60751
U: Cu-CuNi, DIN 43710-1985 PL II: According to Platinel II electromotive force charts from BASF (previously Engelhard)
W: W5Re/W26Re, ASTM E988-1990

Analog input
Input type Current Voltage
Input
4 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA 1 to 5 V 0 to 5 V 0 to 10 V
specification
Usable in the following ranges by scaling:
Setting range -1999 to 9999, -199.9 to 999.9,
-19.99 to 99.99 or -1.999 to 9.999
Set value 25 26 27 28 29

41
 E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC

Alarm Types
Each alarm can be independently set to one of the following 19 alarm types. The default is 2: Upper limit. (see note.)
Auxiliary outputs are allocated for alarms. ON delays and OFF delays (0 to 999 s) can also be specified.
Note: In the default settings for models with HB or HS alarms, alarm 1 is set to a heater alarm (HA) and the Alarm Type 1 parameter is not displayed.
To use alarm 1, set the output assignment to alarm 1.

Alarm output operation

Set
Alarm type When alarm value X When alarm value X Description of function
value
is positive is negative
0 Alarm function OFF Output OFF No alarm
Set the upward deviation in the set point for the alarm upper
L H
ON limit (H) and the lower deviation in the set point for the alarm
1 Upper- and lower-limit *1 OFF PV
*2
SP lower limit (L). The alarm is ON when the PV is outside this
deviation range.
X X Set the upward deviation in the set point by setting the alarm
2 ON ON
Upper-limit OFF PV OFF PV value (X). The alarm is ON when the PV is higher than the
(default) SP SP
SP by the deviation or more.
X X Set the downward deviation in the set point by setting the
ON ON
3 Lower-limit OFF PV OFF PV alarm value (X). The alarm is ON when the PV is lower than
SP SP
the SP by the deviation or more.
Set the upward deviation in the set point for the alarm upper
L H
Upper- and lower-limit ON limit (H) and the lower deviation in the set point for the alarm
4 OFF PV *3
range *1 SP lower limit (L). The alarm is ON when the PV is inside this
deviation range.
L H
Upper- and lower-limit with ON A standby sequence is added to the upper- and lower-limit
5 OFF PV *4
standby sequence *1 *5 SP alarm (1). *6
X X
Upper-limit with standby ON ON
6 OFF PV OFF PV A standby sequence is added to the upper-limit alarm (2). *6
sequence SP SP

X X
Lower-limit with standby ON ON
7 OFF PV OFF PV A standby sequence is added to the lower-limit alarm (3). *6
sequence SP SP

X X
Absolute-value upper- ON ON The alarm will turn ON if the process value is larger than the
8 OFF PV OFF PV
limit 0 0 alarm value (X) regardless of the set point.
X X
ON ON The alarm will turn ON if the process value is smaller than the
9 Absolute-value lower-limit OFF PV OFF PV
0 0 alarm value (X) regardless of the set point.
Absolute-value upper- X X
ON ON A standby sequence is added to the absolute-value upper-
10 limit with standby OFF PV OFF PV
0 0 limit alarm (8). *6
sequence
X X
Absolute-value lower-limit ON ON A standby sequence is added to the absolute-value lower-
11 OFF PV OFF PV
with standby sequence 0 0 limit alarm (9). *6
12 LBA (alarm 1 type only) - *7
13 PV change rate alarm - *8
X X
SP absolute-value ON ON This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the set point (SP)
14 OFF SP OFF SP
upper-limit alarm 0 0 is higher than the alarm value (X).
X X
SP absolute-value ON ON This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the set point (SP)
15 OFF SP OFF SP
lower-limit alarm 0 0 is lower than the alarm value (X).
Standard Control Standard Control
X X
ON ON
OFF MV OFF MV
0 0
MV absolute-value This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the manipulated
16 Heating/Cooling
upper-limit alarm *9 Heating/Cooling variable (MV) is higher than the alarm value (X).
Control (Heating MV) Control (Heating MV)
X
ON
OFF
0
MV Always ON
Standard Control Standard Control
X X
ON ON
OFF MV OFF MV
0 0
MV absolute-value This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the manipulated
17 Heating/Cooling Heating/Cooling
lower-limit alarm *9 variable (MV) is lower than the alarm value (X).
Control (Cooling MV) Control (Cooling MV)
X
ON
OFF
0
MV Always ON
X X
RSP absolute-value ON ON This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the remote SP
18 OFF RSP OFF RSP
upper-limit alarm *10 0 0 (RSP) is higher than the alarm value (X).
X X
RSP absolute-value ON ON This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the remote SP
19 OFF RSP OFF RSP
lower-limit alarm *10 0 0 (RSP) is lower than the alarm value (X).

42
 E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC

*1. With set values 1, 4 and 5, the upper and lower limit values can *4. Set value: 5, Upper- and lower-limit with standby sequence
be set independently for each alarm type, and are expressed as For Upper- and Lower-Limit Alarm Described Above *2
“L” and “H.” • Case 1 and 2
*2. Set value: 1, Upper- and lower-limit alarm Always OFF when the upper-limit and lower-limit hysteresis overlaps.
Case 1 Case 2 Case 3 (Always ON) • Case 3: Always OFF
H<0, L<0
H SP L
*5. Set value: 5, Upper- and lower-limit with standby sequence
L H SP SP L H
H<0, L>0
Always OFF when the upper-limit and lower-limit hysteresis
H<0, L>0 H>0, L<0 overlaps.
H L SP |H| ≥ |L|
|H| < |L| |H| > |L| *6. Refer to the E5@C Digital Temperature Controllers User's Manual
H>0, L<0
SP H L |H| ≤ |L|
(Cat. No. H174) for information on the operation of the standby
sequence.
*3. Set value: 4, Upper- and lower-limit range
*7. Refer to the E5@C Digital Temperature Controllers User's Manual
Case 1 Case 2 Case 3 (Always OFF)
(Cat. No. H174) for information on the loop burnout alarm (LBA).
H<0, L<0
L H SP H SP L This setting cannot be used with a position-proportional model.
SP L H
H<0, L>0 *8. Refer to the E5@C Digital Temperature Controllers User's Manual
H<0, L>0 H>0, L<0
|H| < |L| |H| > |L| H L SP |H| ≥ |L| (Cat. No. H174) for information on the PV change rate alarm.
*9. When heating/cooling control is performed, the MV absolute
H>0, L<0
|H| ≤ |L|
upper limit alarm functions only for the heating operation and the
SP H L
MV absolute lower limit alarm functions only for the cooling
operation.
*10.This value is displayed only when a remote SP input is used. It
functions in both Local SP Mode and Remote SP Mode.

43
 E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC

Characteristics
Thermocouple: (0.3% of indication value or 1°C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max. *1
Indication accuracy Platinum resistance thermometer: (0.2% of indication value or 0.8°C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max.
(at the ambient temperature of Analog input: 0.2% FS 1 digit max.
23°C) CT input: 5% FS 1 digit max.
Potentiometer input: 5% FS 1 digit max.
Transfer output accuracy 0.3% FS max.
Remote SP Input Type 0.2% FS 1 digit max.
Influence of temperature *2 Thermocouple input (R, S, B, W, PL II): (1% of indication value or 10°C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max.
Other thermocouple input: (1% of indication value or 4°C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max. *3
Influence of voltage *2 Platinum resistance thermometer: (1% of indication value or 2°C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max.
Analog input: 1%FS 1 digit max.
Influence of EMS. CT input: 5% FS 1 digit max.
(at EN 61326-1) Remote SP input: 1% FS 1 digit max.
Input sampling period 50ms
Temperature input: 0.1 to 999.9°C or °F (in units of 0.1°C or°F)
Hysteresis
Analog input: 0.01% to 99.99% FS (in units of 0.01% FS)
Temperature input: 0.1 to 999.9°C or °F (in units of 0.1°C or °F)
Proportional band (P)
Analog input: 0.1 to 999.9% FS (in units of 0.1% FS)
Standard, heating/cooling, or Position-proportional (Close): 0 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.0 to 999.9 s (in units of 0.1 s)
Integral time (I)
Position-proportional (Floating): 1 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.1 to 999.9 s (in units of 0.1 s)*4
Derivative time (D) 0 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.0 to 999.9 s (in units of 0.1 s) *4
Temperature input: 0.1 to 999.9°C or °F (in units of 0.1°C or °F)
Proportional band (P) for cooling
Analog input: 0.1 to 999.9% FS (in units of 0.1% FS)
Integral time (I) for cooling 0 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.0 to 999.9 s (in units of 0.1 s) *4
Derivative time (D) for cooling 0 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.0 to 999.9 s (in units of 0.1 s) *4
Control period 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1 to 99 s (in units of 1 s)
Manual reset value 0.0 to 100.0% (in units of 0.1%)
Alarm setting range -1999 to 9999 (decimal point position depends on input type)
Influence of signal source Thermocouple: 0.1°C/ max. (100  max.)
resistance Platinum resistance thermometer: 0.1°C/ max. (10  max.)
Insulation resistance 20 M min. (at 500 VDC)
Dielectric strength 3,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between terminals of different charge
Malfunction 10 to 55 Hz, 20 m/s2 for 10 min each in X, Y, and Z directions
Vibration
Resistance 10 to 55 Hz, 20 m/s2 for 2 hrs each in X, Y, and Z directions
Malfunction 100 m/s2, 3 times each in X, Y, and Z directions
Shock
Resistance 300 m/s2, 3 times each in X, Y, and Z directions
E5EC/E5EC-B: Controller: Approx. 210 g, Adapter: Approx. 4 g  2
Weight
E5AC: Controller: Approx. 250 g, Adapter: Approx. 4 g  2
Degree of protection Front panel: IP66, Rear case: IP20, Terminals: IP00
Memory protection Non-volatile memory (number of writes: 1,000,000 times)
E5EC/E5AC: CX-Thermo version 4.5 or higher
Setup Tool
E5EC-B: CX-Thermo version 4.65 or higher
E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC top panel: An E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable is used to connect to a
USB port on the computer.*5
Setup Tool port
E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC front panel: An E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable and E58-CIFQ2-E Conversion
Cable are used together to connect to a USB port on the computer.*5
cULus: UL 61010-1/CSA C22.2 No.61010-1, Korean wireless regulations (Radio law: KC Mark) (Some
Approved standards
Standards models only.) *6, Lloyd's standards *7
Conformed standards EN 61010-1 (IEC 61010-1)
EMI EN 61326-1 *8
Radiated Interference Electromagnetic Field Strength: EN 55011 Group 1, class A
Noise Terminal Voltage: EN 55011 Group 1, class A
EMS: EN 61326-1 *8
ESD Immunity: EN 61000-4-2
EMC
Electromagnetic Field Immunity: EN 61000-4-3
Burst Noise Immunity: EN 61000-4-4
Conducted Disturbance Immunity: EN 61000-4-6
Surge Immunity: EN 61000-4-5
Voltage Dip/Interrupting Immunity: EN 61000-4-11
*1. The indication accuracy of K thermocouples in the -200 to 1,300°C range, T and N thermocouples at a temperature of -100°C max., and U and
L thermocouples at any temperatures is 2°C 1 digit max. The indication accuracy of the B thermocouple at a temperature of 400°C max.
is not specified. The indication accuracy of B thermocouples at a temperature of 400 to 800°C is 3°C max. The indication accuracy of the R
and S thermocouples at a temperature of 200°C max. is 3°C 1 digit max. The indication accuracy of W thermocouples is (0.3% of PV or 3C,
whichever is greater) 1 digit max. The indication accuracy of PL II thermocouples is (0.3% of PV or 2°C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max.
*2. Ambient temperature: -10°C to 23°C to 55°C, Voltage range: -15% to 10% of rated voltage
*3. K thermocouple at -100°C max.: 10°C max.
*4. The unit is determined by the setting of the Integral/Derivative Time Unit parameter.
*5. External communications (RS-485) and USB-serial conversion cable communications can be used at the same time.
*6. Refer to your OMRON website for the most recent information on applicable models.
*7. Refer to information on maritime standards in Shipping Standards on page 110 for compliance with Lloyd's Standards.
*8. Industrial electromagnetic environment (EN/IEC 61326-1 Table 2)

44
 E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC

USB-Serial Conversion Cable When Digital Temperature Controllers are

connected, set points and RUN/STOP
Applicable OS Windows XP/Vista/7/8/10 *1 commands can be sent from the Digital
E5EC/E5AC:CX-Thermo version 4.5 or higher Temperature Controller that is set as the
Applicable software Component
E5EC-B:CX-Thermo version 4.65 or higher master to the Digital Temperature
Communications *1
Applicable models E5@C-T Series, E5@C Series, and E5CB Series Controllers that are set as slaves.
USB interface standard Conforms to USB Specification 2.0. Slope and offsets can be set for the set point.
Number of connected Digital Temperature
DTE speed 38,400 bps Controllers: 32 max. (including master)
Computer: USB (type A plug) When Digital Temperature Controllers are
Connector
Digital Temperature Controller: connected, the parameters can be copied
specifications
Special serial connector Copying *2 from the Digital Temperature Controller that is
Power supply Bus power (Supplied from USB host controller.) *2 set as the master to the Digital Temperature
Power supply voltage 5 VDC Controllers that are set as slaves.
Current consumption 450 mA max. MELSEC is a registered trademark of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.
4.70.2 VDC KEYENCE is a registered trademark of Keyence Corporation.
Output voltage (Supplied from USB-Serial Conversion Cable *1. A Temperature Controller with version 1.1 or higher is required.
to the Digital Temperature Controller.) A Temperature Controller with version 2.1 or higher is required for
250 mA max. the FX Series or the KV Series.
Output current (Supplied from USB-Serial Conversion Cable *2. Both the programless communications and the component
to the Digital Temperature Controller.) communications support the copying.
Ambient operating
0 to 55°C (with no condensation or icing)
temperature Current Transformer (Order Separately) Ratings
Ambient operating Dielectric strength 1,000 VAC for 1 min
10% to 80%
humidity
Vibration resistance 50 Hz, 98 m/s2
Storage temperature -20 to 60°C (with no condensation or icing)
E54-CT1: Approx. 11.5 g,
Storage humidity 10% to 80% Weight
E54-CT3: Approx. 50 g
Altitude 2,000 m max.
Accessories Armatures (2)
Weight Approx. 120 g (E54-CT3 only) Plugs (2)
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and or other countries. Heater Burnout Alarms and SSR Failure Alarms
*1. CX-Thermo version 4.65 or higher runs on Windows 10.
*2. Use a high-power port for the USB port. Models with detection for singlephase
Note: A driver must be installed on the computer. Refer to the Instruction CT input (for heater heaters: One input
Manual included with the Cable for the installation procedure. current detection) Models with detection for singlephase or
three-phase heaters: Two inputs
Communications Specifications Maximum heater
50 A AC
current
Transmission line
RS-485: Multidrop Input current
connection method 5% FS 1 digit max.
indication accuracy
Communications RS-485 (two-wire, half duplex)
Heater burnout alarm 0.1 to 49.9 A (in units of 0.1 A)
Synchronization method Start-stop synchronization setting range *1 Minimum detection ON time: 100 ms *3
Protocol CompoWay/F, or Modbus SSR failure alarm 0.1 to 49.9 A (in units of 0.1 A)
Baud rate * 9600, 19200, 38400, or 57600 bps setting range *2 Minimum detection OFF time: 100 ms *4
Transmission code ASCII *1. For heater burnout alarms, the heater current will be measured
Data bit length * 7 or 8 bits when the control output is ON, and the output will turn ON if the
Stop bit length * 1 or 2 bits heater current is lower than the set value (i.e., heater burnout
detection current value).
Vertical parity (none, even, odd)
*2. For SSR failure alarms, the heater current will be measured when
Error detection Block check character (BCC) with
the control output is OFF, and the output will turn ON if the heater
CompoWay/F or CRC-16 Modbus
current is higher than the set value (i.e., SSR failure detection
Flow control None current value).
Interface RS-485 *3. The value is 30 ms for a control period of 0.1 s or 0.2 s.
Retry function None *4. The value is 35 ms for a control period of 0.1 s or 0.2 s.
Communications buffer 217 bytes
Communications 0 to 99 ms
Electrical Life Expectancy Curve for
response wait time Default: 20 ms Relays (Reference Values)
* The baud rate, data bit length, stop bit length, and vertical parity can
Life (× 104 operations)

500
be individually set using the Communications Setting Level. 300

Communications Functions E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC

100 250 VAC, 30 VDC
You can use the memory in the PLC to read and write (resistive load)
E5@C parameters, start and stop operation, etc. The 50 cosφ = 1
E5@C automatically performs communications with 30
PLCs. No communications programming is required.
Number of connected Digital Temperature Controllers:
32 max. (Up to 16 for the FX Series) 10
Programless Applicable PLCs
communications *1 OMRON PLCs 5
CS Series, CJ Series, or CP Series
Mitsubishi Electric PLCs 3
MELSEC Q Series, L Series, or FX Series
(compatible with the FX2 or FX3 (excluding the FX1S)) 1
KEYENCE PLCs 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
KEYENCE KV Series
Switching current (A)

45
 E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC
External Connections
E5EC/E5AC (Screw Terminal)
E5EC-@@ 4 @ 5 M - @ @ @ E5AC-@@ 4 @ 5 M - @ @ @
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) The E5EC is set for a K-type thermocouple (input
↑ ↑ type = 5) by default. An input error (s.err) will occur
if the input type setting does not agree with the
Terminal type Terminal type temperature sensor. Check the input type.
Control output 1 Control output 2 Auxiliary outputs 1, 2, 3, 4 (6) Options
Relay output Relay output Relay output 004 005 009 010
250 VAC, 5 A 250 VAC, 5 A Models with 4 auxiliary Communications 4 event inputs Communications, 2 event 4 event inputs
(resistive load) (resistive load) outputs: 250 VAC, 2 A and 2 event inputs inputs, and 2 CT inputs and 1 CT input
Voltage output Voltage output (resistive load) B(+) B(+)
(for driving SSR) 13 (-) 13 13 (-) 13
(for driving SSR) RS-485 RS-485
12 VDC, 40 mA 12 VDC, 21 mA 14 14 14 14
A(-) EV3 A(-) EV3
When There Is a Linear current output 15 15 15 15
EV4 EV4
Control Output 2: 0 to 20 mA DC (-) 16 (-) 16 (-) 16 (-) 16
21 mA 4 to 20 mA DC 17 17 17 17
Linear current output Load: 500 Ω max. EV1 EV1 EV1 EV1
0 to 20 mA DC 18 18 18 18
EV2 EV2 EV2 EV2
4 to 20 mA DC 19 19 19 19
CT1 CT1
Load: 500 Ω max. 20 20 COM 20 20
CT2
21 21 21 21
(1) Control output
RX QX CX
011
Models with Models with 1 Models with 1
1 Relay Output
6 event Inputs, 1 CT input,
Voltage Output Linear Current Output
(for Driving SSR) transfer output, and remote SP input

3 OUT1 3 OUT1 OUT1 (-) 13

+Q 3 + C (3) Input Power Supply
R - - 14
4 4 4 EV3
100 to 240 VAC 24 VAC/DC
5 5 15
5 1 EV4
1 (-) 28 (-) 16
6 6 6
2 2 29 17
EV5 EV1
QQ QR (no polarity) 30 18
EV6 EV2
Models with 2 Voltage Models with Voltage Output (for + 31 19
Outputs (for Driving SSR) Driving SSR) and Relay Output Transfer V + CT1
I 32 20
output
3 OUT1 OUT1 - 33 21
+Q 3 +Q 1 25 13
4 - 4 - 2 26 14 + 34
Remote V +
35
5 +Q 5 3 27 15 SP input mA
- R - 36
6 6 4 28 16
OUT2 OUT2
5 29 17
RR PR CC 013 014
Models with 2 Models with 2 Models with 2 6 30 18 6 event Inputs, transfer Communications, 4 event Inputs,
Relay Outputs Position-proportional Linear Current 7 31 19 output, and remote SP input transfer output, and remote SP input
Relay Output Outputs B(+)
Open 8 32 20
OUT1 OUT1 (-) 13 13
3 3 3 + C RS-485
R R 9 33 21 14 14
4 4 4 - EV3 A(-)
10 34 22 15 15
5 5 5 EV4
+ C 11 35 23 (-) 28 (-) 16 (-) 28 (-) 16
R R -
6 OUT2 6 Close
6 OUT2 12 36 24 29 17 29 17
EV5 EV1 EV5 EV1
CQ 30 18 30 18
EV6 EV2 EV6 EV2
Models with 2 Outputs: Linear Current Output + 31 19 + 31 19
and Voltage (for Driving SSR) Transfer V + Transfer V +
output 32
I 20 I 32 20
output
3 OUT1 (2) Auxiliary Outputs Potentiometer Input - 33 21 - 33 21
+ C
- 19 + 34 + 34
4 Auxiliary outputs 1, 2, 3, 4
O Remote V
+
35 Remote V + 35
20 mA
5 + Q 7
Auxiliary output 4 W SP input mA SP input
21 - 36 - 36
6 - 8 C
OUT2 Auxiliary output 3
9
10 Use no-voltage inputs for the event inputs.
Auxiliary output 2 (5) Sensor (Temperature/Analog) Input The polarity for non-contact inputs is given in parentheses.
11
Auxiliary output 1 TC Pt I V
12 A
22 22 + 22 22
- 23 B mA -
23 23 23
B - V
+ 24 24 24
+
24

Note: 1. The application of the terminals depends on the model.

2. Do not wire the terminals that are shown with a gray background.
3. When complying with EMC standards, the cable that connects the
sensor must be 30 m or less. If the cable length exceeds 30 m,
compliance with EMC standards will not be possible.
4. Connect M3 crimped terminals.

46
 E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC

E5EC-B (Push-In Plus Terminal)

E5EC-@@ @ @ B M - @ @ @
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
↑
Terminal type

Control output 1 Auxiliary outputs 1, 2, 3, 4

The E5EC is set for a K-type
Relay output Relay output thermocouple (input type = 5) by
250 VAC, 5 A Model with 2 auxiliary default. An input error (s.err) will
(resistive load) outputs: 250 VAC, 3 A occur if the input type setting does
(resistive load) not agree with the temperature
Voltage output
sensor. Check the input type.
(for driving SSR) Models with 4 auxiliary
12 VDC, 40 mA outputs: 250 VAC, 2 A
(resistive load) (6) Options
(3) Input Power Supply 008 010
Communications, 2 event 4 event inputs and 1 CT input
100 to 240 VAC 24 VAC/DC
inputs, and 1 CT input
1 1 B(+) (-)
* * 17 17
2 2 * (-) *
(1) Control output RS-485 18 18
3 3
RX QX * * 19 19
Models with Models with 1 EV3
1 Relay Output Voltage Output
4 4 A(-) *
(for Driving SSR) (no polarity) 20 20
EV4
(-) (-)
OUT1 OUT1 21 21
5 5 +Q * *
R (-) (-)
6 6 - 22 22
1 33 17
2 34 18 23 23
EV1 EV1
3 35 19
24 24
(2) Auxiliary Outputs 4 36 20 EV2 EV2
5 37 21 25 25
Auxiliary outputs 1, 2 Auxiliary outputs 1, 2, 3, 4 CT1 CT1
6 38 22 26 26
9 9 7 39 23
Auxiliary output 4 8 40 24 011
10 10 9 41 25 6 event Inputs, 1 CT input, transfer output, and remote SP input
*
11 11 10 42 26
(-) (-)
Auxiliary output 2 Auxiliary output 3 11 43 27 37 17
12 12 (-) * (-) *
12 44 28 38 18
13 45 29
13 13 39 19
Auxiliary output 2 14 46 30 EV5 EV3
14 14 15 47 31 40 20
* 16 48 32
EV6 EV4
(-)
15 15 41 21
Auxiliary output 1 Auxiliary output 1 + (-) *
16 16 42 22
+ V Transfer
43 output 23
I EV1
44 - 24
(5) Sensor (Temperature/Analog) Input EV2
TC Pt V 45 25
I CT1
A + 30 + 46
30 30 30 26
B mA V
- 31 31 31 - 31 Remote + 47
B - V SP input mA
+ 32 32 32
+
32 - 48

Use no-voltage inputs for the event inputs.

Note: 1. The application of the terminals depends on the model. The polarity for non-contact inputs is given in parentheses.
2. Do not wire the terminals that are shown with a gray background.
3. When complying with EMC standards, the cable that connects the sensor must be 30 m or less. If the cable length exceeds 30 m,
compliance with EMC standards will not be possible.
4. Refer to Wiring Precautions for E5@C-B (Controllers with Push-In Plus Terminal) on page 116 for wire specifications and wiring
methods.
5. Common terminals are indicated with asterisks (*). You can use the input power supply and communications common terminals for
crossover wiring. Do not exceed the maximum number of Temperature Controllers given below if you use crossover wiring for the
input power supply.
100 to 240 VAC Controllers: 16 max.
24 VAC/VDC Controllers: 8 max.
Wiring Example:
1
2
3
4

To another E5@C

47
 E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC
Isolation/Insulation Block Diagrams
Models with 2 Auxiliary Outputs Models with 4 Auxiliary Outputs

Sensor input, CT inputs, and remote SP input Sensor input, CT inputs, potentiometer input, and remote SP input

Communications and event inputs Communications and event inputs

Voltage output (for driving SSR) and transfer output Voltage output (for driving SSR),
Power Power linear current output, and transfer output
Supply Supply
Relay output
Relay output
Auxiliary output 1
Auxiliary outputs 1, 2
Auxiliary output 2
Auxiliary outputs 3, 4

: Reinforced insulation : Reinforced insulation

: Functional isolation : Functional isolation

Note: Auxiliary outputs 1 to 2 and 3 to 4 are not insulated.

Nomenclature
E5EC/E5EC-B
Front panel

No. 1 display
Top View of E5EC Top View of E5EC-B
PV or specified parameter
Temperature unit
No. 2 display
Operation indicators
SP or specified parameter value

No. 3 display
Front-panel Setup Tool port Manipulated value or other value

Use the U D Keys to set

the parameter.

Use S Key to change the

digit (default setting).

Use the M Key to change to

Top-panel
another parameter. Setup
Press O Key once to go to Adjustment Level.
Tool port

Press O Key for at least 3 seconds

to go to Initial Setting Level.

E5AC
Front Panel

Top View of E5AC

Temperature unit
No. 1 display
Operation indicators
PV or specified parameter

No. 2 display

SP or specified parameter value

Front-panel Setup Tool port No. 3 display

Manipulated value or other value

Top-panel
Press the U or D Key to set the parameter.
Setup
Tool port

Press the S Key to change the digit (default setting).

Press the O Key once to go to the Adjustment Level.

Press the M Key to change to another parameter.
Press the O Key for at least 3 seconds to go to the Initial Setting Level.

48
 E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC
Dimensions (Unit: mm)

Controllers
E5EC
(64)
4
48 60 44
1

96 110 91

Waterproof
Packing (Accessory) Mounting Adapter
(Accessory)

E5EC-B 4
(71.4)
67.4
(1)
48 44

96 110 91

Waterproof Packing Mounting Adapter

(Accessory) (Accessory)

• Setup Tool ports are provided as standard feature. Use these ports to connect a computer to the Digital Temperature Controller. The E58-
CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable is required to connect to the port on the top panel. The E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable and
E58-CIFQ2-E Communications Conversion Cable are required to connect to the port on the front panel. (You cannot leave either port
connected constantly during operation.)

Mounted Separately Group Mounted *

(48 × number of units − 2.5)+1.0
0 * E5EC:
45+0.6
0 Selections for Control Outputs 1 and 2: QQ, QR, RR, CC, PR, or CQ
If you also specify 011, 013, or 014 for the option selection and use
group mounting, the ambient temperature must be 45°C or less.
Maintain the following spacing when more than one Digital
92+0.8
0 Controller is installed at an ambient temperature of 55°C.

60 min.
45-0.6
0

Group mounting does not

120 min.
allow waterproofing.

92+0.8
0

92-0.8
0

120 min.

• Recommended panel thickness is 1 to 8 mm.

• Group mounting is not possible in the vertical direction. (Maintain the
specified mounting space between Controllers.)
• To mount the Controller so that it is waterproof, insert the waterproof
packing onto the Controller.
• When two or more Controllers are mounted, make sure that the sur-
rounding temperature does not exceed the allowable operating tem-
perature specified in the specifications.

49
 E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC

E5AC (64)
4
60
96 x 96 1 91 x 91

110 91

Waterproof
Packing (Accessory) Mounting Adapter
(Accessory)
• Setup Tool ports are provided as standard feature. Use these ports to connect a computer to the
Digital Temperature Controller. The E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable is required to
connect to the port on the top panel. The E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable and E58-
CIFQ2-E Communications Conversion Cable are required to connect to the port on the front panel.
(You cannot leave either port connected constantly during operation.)

Mounted Separately Group Mounted • Recommended panel thickness is 1 to 8 mm.

(96 × number of units − 3.5)+1.0
0
92+0.8
• Group mounting is not possible in the vertical direction. (Maintain the
0
specified mounting space between Controllers.)
• To mount the Controller so that it is waterproof, insert the waterproof
packing onto the Controller.
• When two or more Controllers are mounted, make sure that the sur-
92+0.8
0 rounding temperature does not exceed the allowable operating tem-
perature specified in the specifications.

120 min. Group mounting does not

allow waterproofing.

92+0.8
0

50
 E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC

Accessories (Order Separately)

USB-Serial Conversion Cable
E58-CIFQ2 (2110)
250 263 1510

LED (RD)

USB connector
(type A plug)
LED (PWR) Serial connector

LED (SD)

Conversion Cable
E58-CIFQ2-E
Conversion Cable Connecting to the E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable
(2110)
(1510) 250 263 1510

E58-CIFQ2 (Order Separately) Conversion Cable

Note: Always use this product together with the E58-CIFQ2.

Terminal Covers Waterproof Packing

E53-COV24 (Three Covers provided.) Y92S-P9 (for DIN 48  96)
2 3.8 The Waterproof Packing is provided with the Temperature
Controller.
Order the Waterproof Packing separately if it becomes lost or
10 damaged.
The degree of protection when the Waterproof Packing is used
is IP66.
Also, keep the Port Cover on the front-panel Setup Tool port
of the E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC securely closed.
To maintain an IP66 degree of protection, the Waterproof
91
Packing and the Port Cover for the front-panel Setup Tool port
must be periodically replaced because they may deteriorate,
shrink, or harden depending on the operating environment.
Y92S-P10 (for DIN 96  96) The replacement period will vary with the operating
environment.
Check the required period in the actual application.
Use 3 years or sooner as a guideline.

Setup Tool Port Cover for top panel Mounting Adapter

Y92S-P7 Y92F-51 (Two Adapters provided.)

One pair is provided with the

Order this Port Cover
Controller.
separately if the Port Cover on
Order this Adapter
the front-panel Setup Tool port
separately if it becomes lost
is lost or damaged. The
or damaged.
Waterproof Packing must be
periodically replaced because
it may deteriorate, shrink, or
harden depending on the
operating environment.

51
 E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC

Watertight Cover Watertight Cover

Y92A-49N (48  96) Y92A-96N (96  96)

21.9 21.9
(2) (2)

131.7 131.7

67.6 28.9 115.6 28.9

Current Transformers
E54-CT1 Thru-current (Io) vs. Output Voltage (Eo)
21
2.8
15
(Reference Values)
5.8 dia.
E54-CT1
7.5
Maximum continuous heater current: 50 A (50/60 Hz)
Number of windings: 4002
25 3
Winding resistance: 182 
10.5 100V

Output voltage (Eo) V (r.m.s.)

Frequency: 50 Hz

40 10 ∞ Distortion
1kΩ factor
Two, 3.5 dia.
10%
1
10 3%
1%
100mV
30

10 100Ω
E54-CT3
2.36 dia. 1 RL=10Ω
30
12 dia.
9 100μV

10
1 10 100mA 1 10 100 1,000A
40 × 40
Thru-current (Io) A (r.m.s.)
Thru-current (Io) vs. Output Voltage (Eo)
(Reference Values)
Two, M3 (depth: 4) E54-CT3
Maximum continuous heater current: 120 A (50/60 Hz)
15
(Maximum continuous heater current for an OMRON Digital
Temperature Controller is 50 A.)
30
Number of windings: 4002
Winding resistance: 80.8 
E54-CT3 Accessories 100V
Output voltage (Eo) V (r.m.s.)

Frequency: 50 Hz
• Armature Connection Example Distortion
∞
10 factor
Armature 1kΩ
10%
Approx. 3 dia. Plug 500Ω 3%
1 1%
Lead

100mV
100Ω
18 50Ω
10
RL=10Ω
• Plug
1

Approx. 6 dia. 100μV

(22) 10
1 10 100mA 1 10 100 1,000A
Thru-current (Io) A (r.m.s.)

52
MEMO

53
 Digital Temperature Controller

E5DC (22.5 mm Wide, and DIN Track-mounting Type)

The E5DC Mounts to DIN Track and Is Ideal

for Connections to HMIs and PLCs.
It provides the Same Easy Operation and
Advanced Performance as the Rest of the
E5@C Series.
• A slim body at 85  22.5 mm (D W) that fits into narrow control
panels and mounts to DIN Track.
• Removable terminal block for easy replacement to simplify maintenance.
• High-speed sampling at 50 ms for applications with high-speed
temperature increases.
• Easy connections to a PLC with programless communications. 22.5 mm Wide, and
• Set up the Controller without wiring the power supply by connecting DIN Track-mounting Type
E5DC
to the computer with a Communications Conversion Cable (sold separately).
Setup is easy with the CX-Thermo (sold separately). Refer to your OMRON website for the most recent
information on applicable safety standards.
• Models are available with up to 2 auxiliary outputs and 1 event input to
complete basic functions. Refer to Safety Precautions on page 108.

• A white PV display (height: 8.5 mm) is easy to read when setting up,
checking alarms, and making settings in a control panel.

Main I/O Functions

Sensor Input E5DC

Universal input
• Thermocouple
• Pt Dual displays: PV/SV 4-digit displays
• Analog current/voltage

Indication Accuracy Control Output 1

• Thermocouple input: • Relay output
±0.3% of PV • Voltage output (for driving SSR)
• Pt input: ±0.2% of PV • Linear current output
• Analog input:
±0.2% of FS
Auxiliary Outputs
Sampling Period • None
• 50 ms •2

Event Inputs
• None
• PF (shift) Key
•1
• Temperature status display
• Simple programming
Serial Communications
• Independent heating and
• None cooling PID control
• RS-485 • Changed parameter display
• Display brightness setting

This datasheet is provided as a guideline for selecting products.

Be sure to refer to the following manuals for application precautions and other information required for operation before attempting
to use the product.
E5@C Digital Temperature Controllers User’s Manual (Cat. No. H174)
E5@C Digital Temperature Controllers Communications Manual (Cat. No. H175)

54
 E5DC
Model Number Legend and Standard Models
Model Number Legend
Models with Screw Terminal
E5DC-@@ @ @ @ M-@@@ (Example: E5DC-RX0ASM-015)
     
A B C D E F
A B C D E F
Model No. of Power Meaning
Control Terminal Input
auxiliary supply Options
output 1 type type
outputs voltage
E5DC 22.5 mm wide and mounts to DIN Track
Control output 1 Control output 2
RX Relay output None
Voltage output
QX None
(for driving SSR)
*1 CX Linear current output *1 None
0 None
2 2 (one common)
A 100 to 240 VAC
D 24 VAC/DC
S Screw terminal (Main Unit and Terminal Unit together)
U Main Unit only (no Terminal Unit)
M Universal input
HB alarm and HS alarm Communications Event input
*2 000 --- --- ---
*3 002 1 RS-485 ---
*4 015 --- RS-485 ---
*5 016 --- --- 1
*3 017 1 --- 1
*1. The control output can be used as a simple transfer output for the Digital Temperature Controllers manufactured in July 2014 or later.
*2. Option 000 can be selected only if two auxiliary outputs are selected.
*3. Options 002 and 017 can be selected only if the control output is a relay output or voltage output and two auxiliary outputs are selected.
*4. Option 015 cannot be selected if the control output is a relay output or voltage output and two auxiliary outputs are selected.
*5. Options 016 can be selected only if the control output is a linear current output and two auxiliary outputs are selected.

List of Models
Options Model Model
No. of auxiliary
Control output HB alarm and HS Power supply voltage Power supply voltage
outputs No. of event inputs Communications
alarm 100 to 240 VAC 24 VAC/DC
E5DC-RX0ASM-015 E5DC-RX0DSM-015
--- RS-485
E5DC-RX0AUM-015 E5DC-RX0DUM-015
---
E5DC-RX2ASM-000 E5DC-RX2DSM-000
--- ---
E5DC-RX2AUM-000 E5DC-RX2DUM-000
Relay output
E5DC-RX2ASM-002 E5DC-RX2DSM-002
2 RS-485
Detection for single- E5DC-RX2AUM-002 E5DC-RX2DUM-002
phase heater E5DC-RX2ASM-017 E5DC-RX2DSM-017
1 ---
E5DC-RX2AUM-017 E5DC-RX2DUM-017
E5DC-QX0ASM-015 E5DC-QX0DSM-015
--- RS-485
E5DC-QX0AUM-015 E5DC-QX0DUM-015
---
E5DC-QX2ASM-000 E5DC-QX2DSM-000
--- ---
Voltage output E5DC-QX2AUM-000 E5DC-QX2DUM-000
(for driving SSR) E5DC-QX2ASM-002 E5DC-QX2DSM-002
2 RS-485
Detection for single- E5DC-QX2AUM-002 E5DC-QX2DUM-002
phase heater E5DC-QX2ASM-017 E5DC-QX2DSM-017
1 ---
E5DC-QX2AUM-017 E5DC-QX2DUM-017
E5DC-CX0ASM-015 E5DC-CX0DSM-015
--- RS-485
E5DC-CX0AUM-015 E5DC-CX0DUM-015
E5DC-CX2ASM-000 E5DC-CX2DSM-000
--- ---
Linear current E5DC-CX2AUM-000 E5DC-CX2DUM-000
---
output E5DC-CX2ASM-015 E5DC-CX2DSM-015
2 RS-485
E5DC-CX2AUM-015 E5DC-CX2DUM-015
E5DC-CX2ASM-016 E5DC-CX2DSM-016
1 ---
E5DC-CX2AUM-016 E5DC-CX2DUM-016

Heating and Cooling Control

Using Heating and Cooling Control
A Control Output Assignment B Control
An auxiliary output is used as the cooling control output. If PID control is used, you can set PID control separately for heating
and cooling.
This allows you to handle control systems with different heating and
cooling response characteristics.

55
 E5DC

Optional Products (Order Separately)

Terminal Unit End Plate
Model Model
E5DC-SCT1S PFP-M

USB-Serial Conversion Cable Spacer

Model Model
E58-CIFQ2 PFP-S

Communications Conversion Cable DIN Tracks

Model Model
E58-CIFQ2-E PFP-100N
Note: Always use this product together with the E58-CIFQ2. PFP-50N
This Cable is used to connect to the front-panel Setup Tool
port.
Unit Labels
Current Transformers (CTs) Model
Hole diameter Model Y92S-L2
5.8 mm E54-CT1
End Cover
12.0 mm E54-CT3
Model
Mounting Adapter Y92F-54
Model
Y92F-53 (2pcs)

Short Bars
Model
Y92S-P11 (4 pcs)

CX-Thermo Support Software

Model
EST2-2C-MV4
Note: CX-Thermo version 4.6 or higher is required for the E5DC.
For the system requirements for the CX-Thermo, refer to
information on the EST2-2C-MV4 on the OMRON website
(www.ia.omron.com).

56
 E5DC
Specifications
Ratings
A in model number: 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Power supply voltage
D in model number: 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz; 24 VDC
Operating voltage range 85 to 110% of rated supply voltage
Power consumption 4.9 VA max. at 100 to 240 VAC, and 2.8 VA max. at 24 VDC or 1.5 W max. at 24 VDC
Temperature input
Thermocouple: K, J, T, E, L, U, N, R, S, B, W, or PL II
Platinum resistance thermometer: Pt100 or JPt100
Sensor input Infrared temperature sensor (ES1B): 10 to 70C, 60 to 120C, 115 to 165C, or 140 to 260C
Analog input
Current input: 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 20 mA
Voltage input: 1 to 5 V, 0 to 5 V, or 0 to 10 V
Current input: 150  max., Voltage input: 1 M min. (Use a 1:1 connection when connecting the ES2-HB/
Input impedance
THB.)
Control method ON/OFF control or 2-PID control (with auto-tuning)
SPST-NO, 250 VAC, 3 A (resistive load), electrical life: 100,000 operations, minimum applicable load: 5
Relay output
V, 10 mA (reference value)
Control
Voltage output
output Output voltage 12 VDC 20% (PNP), max. Load current: 21 mA, with short-circuit protection circuit
(for driving SSR)
Linear current output 4 to 20 mA DC/0 to 20 mA DC, load: 500  max., resolution: Approx. 10,000
Number of outputs 2 (depends on model)
Auxiliary
output SPST-NO relay outputs: 250 VAC, 2 A (resistive load),
Output specifications
Electrical life: 100,000 operations, Minimum applicable load: 10 mA at 5 V (reference value)
Number of inputs 1 (depends on model)
Event Contact input ON: 1 k max., OFF: 100 k min.
input External contact input
Non-contact input ON: Residual voltage 1.5 V max.; OFF: Leakage current 0.1 mA max.
specifications
Current flow: approx. 7 mA per contact
Setting method Digital setting using front panel keys
11-segment digital displays and individual indicators
Indication method
Character height: PV: 8.5 mm, SV: 8.0 mm
Up to eight set points (SP0 to SP7) can be saved and selected using the event inputs, key operations, or
Multi SP
serial communications. *1
Bank switching None
Manual output, heating/cooling control, loop burnout alarm, SP ramp, other alarm functions, heater
burnout (HB) alarm (including SSR failure (HS) alarm), 40% AT, 100% AT, MV limiter, input digital filter,
Other functions self tuning, robust tuning, PV input shift, run/stop, protection functions, extraction of square root, MV
change rate limit, logic operations, temperature status display, simple programming, moving average of
input value, display brightness setting, simple transfer output, *2 and work bit message *2
10 to 55C (with no condensation or icing), For 3-year warranty: 10 to 50C with standard mounting (with
Ambient operating temperature
no condensation or icing)
Ambient operating humidity 25 to 85%
Storage temperature 25 to 65C (with no condensation or icing)
Altitude 2,000 m max.
Recommended fuse T2A, 250 VAC, time-lag, low-breaking capacity
Installation environment Overvoltage category II, Pollution Degree 2 (EN/IEC/UL 61010-1)
*1. Only two set points are selectable for event inputs.
*2. Usage is possible for the Digital Temperature Controllers manufactured in July 2014 or later.

57
 E5DC

Input Ranges
Thermocouple/Platinum Resistance Thermometer (Universal inputs)
Sensor Platinum resistance Infrared temperature
Thermocouple
type thermometer sensor
Sensor 10 to 60 to 115 to 140 to
Pt100 JPt100 K J T E L U N R S B W PLII 70°C 120°C 165°C 260°C
specification
2300
2300
1800
1800
1700 1700
1700
1600
1500
1400
1300 1300 1300
1300
Temperature range (°C)

1200
1100
1000
850 850 850
900
800
700
600
600
500.0 500.0 500.0
500
400.0 400 400.0 400 400.0
400
260
300
120 165
200
100.0 100.0 90
100
100
0.0 0.0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-100
-20.0 -100 -20.0 -100
-200
-200 -199.9 -199.9 -200 -200 -199.9 -200 -200 -199.9 -200
Set value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Shaded settings are the default settings.

The applicable standards for the input types are as follows:

K, J, T, E, N, R, S, B: JIS C 1602-1995, IEC 60584-1JPt100: JIS C 1604-1989, JIS C 1606-1989
L: Fe-CuNi, DIN 43710-1985Pt100: JIS C 1604-1997, IEC 60751
U: Cu-CuNi, DIN 43710-1985PL II: According to Platinel II electromotive force charts from BASF (previously Engelhard)
W: W5Re/W26Re, ASTM E988-1990

Analog input
Input type Current Voltage
Input specification 4 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA 1 to 5 V 0 to 5 V 0 to 10 V
Usable in the following ranges by scaling:
Setting range -1999 to 9999, -199.9 to 999.9,
-19.99 to 99.99 or -1.999 to 9.999
Set value 25 26 27 28 29

58
 E5DC

Alarm Types
Each alarm can be independently set to one of the following 17 alarm types. The default is 2: Upper limit. (See note.)
Auxiliary outputs are allocated to alarms. ON delays and OFF delays (0 to 999 s) can also be specified.
Note: In the default settings for models with HB or HS alarms, alarm 1 is set to a heater alarm (HA) and the Alarm Type 1 parameter is not displayed.
To use alarm 1, set the output assignment to alarm 1.

Alarm output operation

Set
Alarm type When alarm value X When alarm value X Description of function
value
is positive is negative
0 Alarm function OFF Output OFF No alarm
Set the upward deviation in the set point for the alarm upper
ON
L H limit (H) and the lower deviation in the set point for the alarm
1 Upper- and lower-limit *1 * 2
OFF
SP
PV lower limit (L). The alarm is ON when the PV is outside this
deviation range.
Set the upward deviation in the set point by setting the alarm
2 ON
X
ON
X
Upper-limit value (X). The alarm is ON when the PV is higher than the
(default) OFF
SP
PV OFF
SP
PV
SP by the deviation or more.
X X Set the downward deviation in the set point by setting the
ON ON
3 Lower-limit OFF PV OFF PV
alarm value (X). The alarm is ON when the PV is lower than
SP SP
the SP by the deviation or more.
Set the upward deviation in the set point for the alarm upper
Upper- and lower-limit ON
L H limit (H) and the lower deviation in the set point for the alarm
4 * 3
range *1 OFF
SP
PV lower limit (L). The alarm is ON when the PV is inside this
deviation range.
Upper- and lower-limit with ON
L H A standby sequence is added to the upper- and lower-limit
5 *4
standby sequence *1 *5
OFF
SP
PV alarm (1). *6
Upper-limit with standby ON
X
ON
X
6 A standby sequence is added to the upper-limit alarm (2). *6
sequence OFF
SP
PV OFF
SP
PV

Lower-limit with standby ON

X
ON
X
7 A standby sequence is added to the lower-limit alarm (3). *6
sequence OFF
SP
PV OFF
SP
PV

Absolute-value upper- ON
X
ON
X The alarm will turn ON if the process value is larger than the
8
limit OFF
0
PV OFF
0
PV alarm value (X) regardless of the set point.
ON
X
ON
X The alarm will turn ON if the process value is smaller than the
9 Absolute-value lower-limit OFF
0
PV OFF
0
PV alarm value (X) regardless of the set point.
Absolute-value upper-
ON
X
ON
X A standby sequence is added to the absolute-value upper-
10 limit with standby OFF
0
PV OFF
0
PV limit alarm (8). *6
sequence
Absolute-value lower-limit ON
X
ON
X A standby sequence is added to the absolute-value lower-
11
with standby sequence OFF
0
PV OFF
0
PV limit alarm (9). *6
12 LBA (alarm 1 type only) - *7
13 PV change rate alarm - *8
SP absolute-value ON
X
ON
X This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the set point (SP)
14
upper-limit alarm OFF
0
SP OFF
0
SP is higher than the alarm value (X).
SP absolute-value ON
X
ON
X This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the set point (SP)
15
lower-limit alarm OFF
0
SP OFF
0
SP is lower than the alarm value (X).
Standard Control Standard Control
X X
ON ON
OFF MV OFF MV
0 0
MV absolute-value This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the manipulated
16 Heating/Cooling
upper-limit alarm *9 Heating/Cooling variable (MV) is higher than the alarm value (X).
Control (Heating MV) Control (Heating MV)
X
ON
OFF
0
MV Always ON
Standard Control Standard Control
X X
ON ON
OFF MV OFF MV
0 0
MV absolute-value This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the manipulated
17 Heating/Cooling Heating/Cooling
lower-limit alarm *9 variable (MV) is lower than the alarm value (X).
Control (Cooling MV) Control (Cooling MV)
X
ON
OFF
0
MV Always ON

59
 E5DC

*1. With set values 1, 4, and 5, the upper- and lower-limit values can *4. Set value: 5, Upper- and lower-limit with standby sequence
be set independently for each alarm type, and are expressed as For Upper- and Lower-Limit Alarm Described Above at *2
“L” and “H.” • In cases 1 and 2 above, the alarm is always OFF if the upper-
*2. Set value: 1, Upper- and lower-limit alarm and lower-limit hysteresis overlaps.
Case 1 Case 2 Case 3 (Always OFF) • In case 3, the alarm is always OFF.
H<0, L<0 *5. Set value: 5, Upper- and lower-limit alarm with standby sequence
L H SP SP L H H SP L The alarm is always OFF if upper- and lower-limit hysteresis
H<0, L>0 overlaps.
H<0, L>0 H>0, L<0
H L SP |H| ≥ |L| *6. Refer to the E5@C Digital Temperature Controllers User’s Manual
|H| < |L| |H| > |L|
H>0, L<0 (Cat. No. H174) for information on the operation of the standby
SP H L |H| ≤ |L| sequence.
*3. Set value: 4, Upper- and lower-limit range *7. Refer to the E5@C Digital Temperature Controllers User’s Manual
Case 1 Case 2 Case 3 (Always ON) (Cat. No. H174) for information on the LBA.
H<0, L<0 *8. Refer to the E5@C Digital Temperature Controllers User’s Manual
L H SP SP L H H SP L (Cat. No. H174) for information on the PV change rate alarm.
H<0, L>0 H>0, L<0
H<0, L>0 *9. When heating/cooling control is performed, the MV absolute-
H L SP |H| ≥ |L| value upper-limit alarm functions only for the heating operation
|H| < |L| |H| > |L|
H>0, L<0 and the MV absolute-value lower-limit alarm functions only for the
SP H L |H| ≤ |L| cooling operation.

60
 E5DC

Characteristics
Thermocouple: (0.3 % of indication value or 1C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max.*1
Indication accuracy
Platinum resistance thermometer: (0.2 % of indication value or 0.8C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max.
(when mounted individually,
Analog input: 0.2% FS 1 digit max.
ambient temperature of 23C)
CT input: 5% FS 1 digit max.
Simple transfer output accuracy 0.3% FS max.*2
Influence of temperature *3 Thermocouple input (R, S, B, W, PL II): (1% of indication value or 10C, whichever is greater) 1 digit
max.
Influence of voltage *3 Other thermocouple input: (1% of indication value or 4C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max. *4
Platinum resistance thermometer: (1% of indication value or 2C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max.
Influence of EMS. Analog input: 1% FS 1 digit max.
(at EN 61326-1) CT input: 5% FS 1 digit max.
R, S, B, W, or PLII thermocouple: (1% of PV or 10C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max.
Installation influence (E5DC only)
Other thermocouple: (1% of PV or 4C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max. *4
Input sampling period 50 ms
Temperature input: 0.1 to 999.9C or F (in units of 0.1C or F)
Hysteresis
Analog input: 0.01% to 99.99% FS (in units of 0.01% FS)
Temperature input: 0.1 to 999.9C or F (in units of 0.1C or F)
Proportional band (P)
Analog input: 0.1% to 999.9% FS (in units of 0.1% FS)
Integral time (I) 0 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.0 to 999.9 s (in units of 0.1 s) *5
Derivative time (D) 0 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.0 to 999.9 s (in units of 0.1 s) *5
Temperature input: 0.1 to 999.9C or F (in units of 0.1C or F)
Proportional band (P) for cooling
Analog input: 0.1% to 999.9% FS (in units of 0.1% FS)
Integral time (I) for cooling 0 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.0 to 999.9 s (in units of 0.1 s) *5
Derivative time (D) for cooling 0 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.0 to 999.9 s (in units of 0.1 s) *5
Control period 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1 to 99 s (in units of 1 s)
Manual reset value 0.0% to 100.0% (in units of 0.1%)
Alarm setting range 1,999 to 9,999 (decimal point position depends on input type)
Influence of signal source
Thermocouple: 0.1C/ max. (100  max.), Platinum resistance thermometer: 0.1C/ max. (10  max.)
resistance
Insulation resistance 20 M min. (at 500 VDC)
Dielectric strength 3,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between terminals of different charge
Malfunction 10 to 55 Hz, 20 m/s2 for 10 min each in X, Y and Z directions
Vibration
Resistance 10 to 55 Hz, 20 m/s2 for 2 hr each in X, Y, and Z directions
Malfunction 100 m/s2, 3 times each in X, Y, and Z directions
Shock
Resistance 300 m/s2, 3 times each in X, Y, and Z directions
Weight Main unit: Approx. 80 g, Terminal unit: Approx. 40 g
Degree of protection Main unit: IP20, Terminal unit: IP00
Memory protection Non-volatile memory (number of writes: 1,000,000 times)
Setup Tool CX-Thermo version 4.6 or higher
E5DC bottom panel: An E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable is used to connect a USB port on the
computer. *6
Setup Tool port
E5DC front panel: An E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable and E58-CIFQ2-E Conversion Cable are
used together to connect a USB port on the computer.*6
cULus: UL 61010-1/CSA C22.2 No.61010-1, Korean wireless regulations (Radio law: KC Mark) (Some
Approved standards
Standards models only.) *7, Lloyd's standards *8
Conformed standards EN 61010-1 (IEC 61010-1)
EMI: EN61326-1 *9
Radiated Interference Electromagnetic Field Strength: EN55011 Group 1, class A
Noise Terminal Voltage: EN55011 Group 1, class A
EMS: EN61326-1 *9
ESD Immunity: EN61000-4-2
EMC
Electromagnetic Field Immunity: EN61000-4-3
Burst Noise Immunity: EN61000-4-4
Conducted Disturbance Immunity: EN61000-4-6
Surge Immunity: EN61000-4-5
Voltage Dip/Interrupting Immunity: EN61000-4-11
*1. The indication accuracy of K thermocouples in the 200 to 1,300C range, T and N thermocouples at a temperature of 100C max., and U
and L thermocouples at any temperature is 2C 1 digit max. The indication accuracy of B thermocouples at a temperature of 400C max. is
not specified. The indication accuracy of B thermocouples at a temperature of 400 to 800C is 3C max.
The indication accuracy of R and S thermocouples at a temperature of 200C max. is 3C 1 digit max. The indication accuracy of W
thermocouples is (0.3% of PV or 3C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max.
The indication accuracy of PLII thermocouples is (0.3% of PV or 2C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max.
*2. However, the precision between 0 and 4 mA for a 0 to 20 mA output is 1% FS max.
*3. Ambient temperature: 10C to 23C to 55C, Voltage range: 15% to 10% of rated voltage
*4. K thermocouple at 100C max.: 10C max.
*5. The unit is determined by the setting of the Integral/Derivative Time Unit parameter.
*6. External serial communications (RS-485) and USB-Serial Conversion Cable communications can be used at the same time.
*7. Refer to your OMRON website for the most recent information on applicable models.
*8. Refer to information on maritime standards in Shipping Standards on page 110 for compliance with Lloyd's Standards.
*9. Industrial electromagnetic environment (EN/IEC 61326-1 Table 2)

61
 E5DC

USB-Serial Conversion Cable When Digital Temperature Controllers are connected,

set points and RUN/STOP commands can be sent
Applicable OS Windows XP/Vista/7/8/10 *1 from the Digital Temperature Controller that is set as
Applicable software CX-Thermo version 4.6 or higher Component
the master to the Digital Temperature Controllers that
Communi-
Applicable models E5@C-T Series, E5@C Series, and E5CB Series are set as slaves.
cations *1
USB interface standardConforms to USB Specification 2.0 Slope and offsets can be set for the set point.
Number of connected Digital Temperature
DTE speed 38,400 bps
Controllers: 32 max. (including master)
Computer: USB (Type A plug)
Connector When Digital Temperature Controllers are connected,
Digital Temperature Controller: Special serial
specifications the parameters can be copied from the Digital
connector Copying *2
Temperature Controller that is set as the master to the
Power supply Bus power (Supplied from the USB host controller) *2 Digital Temperature Controllers that are set as slaves.
Power supply voltage 5 VDC MELSEC is a registered trademark of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.
Current consumption 450 mA max. KEYENCE is a registered trademark of Keyence Corporation.
4.70.2 VDC (Supplied from USB-Serial *1. A Temperature Controller with version 2.1 or higher is required for
Output voltage Conversion Cable to the Digital Temperature the FX Series or the KV Series.
Controller.) *2. Both the programless communications and the component
250 mA max. (Supplied from USB-Serial communications support the copying.
Output current Conversion Cable to the Digital Temperature
Controller.) Current Transformer (Order Separately)
Ambient operating
0 to 55C (with no condensation or icing) Ratings
temperature
Ambient operating Dielectric strength 1,000 VAC for 1 min
10% to 80% Vibration resistance 50 Hz, 98 m/s2
humidity
Storage temperature 20 to 60C (with no condensation or icing) Weight
E54-CT1: Approx. 11.5 g,
Storage humidity 10% to 80% E54-CT3: Approx. 50 g
Altitude 2,000 m max. Accessories Armatures (2)
(E54-CT3 only) Plugs (2)
Weight Approx. 120 g
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and or other countries. Heater Burnout Alarms and SSR Failure
*1. CX-Thermo version 4.65 or higher runs on Windows 10. Alarms
*2. Use a high-power port for the USB port.
CT input (for heater Models with detection for single-phase
Note: A driver must be installed on the computer. Refer to the Instruction
current detection) heaters: One input
Manual included with the Cable for the installation procedure.
Maximum heater current 50 A AC
Communications Specifications Input current
5% FS 1 digit max.
indication accuracy
Transmission line
RS-485: Multidrop Heater burnout alarm 0.1 to 49.9 A (in units of 0.1 A)
connection method
setting range *1 Minimum detection ON time: 100 ms *3
Communications RS-485 (two-wire, half duplex)
0.1 to 49.9 A (in units of 0.1 A)
Synchronization method Start-stop synchronization SSR failure alarm setting
Minimum detection OFF time: 100 ms
Protocol CompoWay/F, or Modbus range *2
*4
Baud rate * 9,600, 19,200, 38,400, or 57,600 bps *1. For heater burnout alarms, the heater current will be measured
Transmission code ASCII when the control output is ON, and the output will turn ON if the
Data bit length * 7 or 8 bits heater current is lower than the set value (i.e., heater burnout
detection current value).
Stop bit length * 1 or 2 bits
*2. For SSR failure alarms, the heater current will be measured when
Vertical parity (none, even, odd) the control output is OFF, and the output will turn ON if the heater
Block check character (BCC) current is higher than the set value (i.e., SSR failure detection
Error detection
with CompoWay/F or current value).
CRC-16 with Modbus *3. The value is 30 ms for a control period of 0.1 s or 0.2 s.
Flow control None *4. The value is 35 ms for a control period of 0.1 s or 0.2 s.
Interface RS-485
Retry function None Electrical Life Expectancy Curve for
Communications buffer 217 bytes Control Output Relay (Reference Values)
Communications 0 to 99 ms
Life (× 104 operations)

500
response wait time Default: 20 ms
300
* The baud rate, data bit length, stop bit length, and vertical parity can
be individually set using the Communications Setting Level.
100
Communications Functions
50
You can use the memory in the PLC to read and write
E5@C parameters, start and stop operation, etc. 30

The E5@C automatically performs communications with

PLCs. No communications programming is required. 10
Number of connected Digital Temperature
Programless Controllers: 32 max. (Up to 16 for the FX Series) 5
E5DC
communica- Applicable PLCs: OMRON PLCs 3 250 VAC, 30 VDC
tions *1 CS Series, CJ Series, or CP Series (resistive load)
cosφ = 1
Mitsubishi Electric PLCs
MELSEC Q Series, L Series, or FX Series 1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
(compatible with the FX2 or FX3 (excluding the FX1S)) Switching current (A)
KEYENCE PLCs
KEYENCE KV Series

62
 E5DC
External Connections
E5DC
Control output Auxiliary outputs 1, 2
The E5DC is set for a K-type thermocouple (input type = 5) by default.
Relay output Relay outputs An input error (s.err) will occur if the input type setting does not agree
250 VAC, 3 A (resistive load) 250 VAC: 2 A (resistive load) with the temperature sensor. Check the input type.
Voltage output (for driving SSR)
12 VDC, 21 mA
Linear current output E5DC M
0 to 20 mA DC Control output Options
4 to 20 mA DC
Load: 500 Ω max. Input Power Supply Control Output
100 to 240 VAC 24 VAC/DC RX QX CX
1 relay 1 voltage output 1 linear
1 1 output (for driving SSR) current output
2 2 5 5 +Q 5 + C
R
6 6 - 6 -
(no polarity)

1 5 9
2 6 10 Auxiliary Outputs
Options
9
002 11 Auxiliary output 2
10
Communications and 1 CT Auxiliary output 1
B(+) 11
3 7
RS-485 CT1
4 8
A(-)

015 Sensor (Temperature/Analog) Input

Communications
TC Pt I V
B(+) A + 12
3 7 12 12 12 12
- B mA - 13
RS-485 13 13 13
4 8 B - V
3 7 13
A(-) + 14 14 14
+
14

016 4 8 14
One event input
(-) 3 7
4 8
EV1

017
One event input and 1 CT
(-) 3 7
CT1
4 8
EV1

Use no-voltage inputs for the event inputs.

The polarity for non-contact inputs is given in parentheses.

Note: 1. The application of the terminals depends on the model.

2. Do not wire the terminals that are shown with a gray background.
3. When complying with EMC standards, the cable that connects the sensor must be 30 m or less. If the cable length exceeds 30m,
compliance with EMC standards will not be possible.
4. Connect M3 crimped terminals.

Isolation/Insulation Block Diagrams

Sensor input and CT input

Communications and event input

Power
Voltage output (for driving SSR) and linear current output
supply

Relay output

Auxiliary outputs 1 and 2

: Reinforced insulation

: Functional isolation

Note: Auxiliary outputs 1 to 2 are not insulated.

63
 E5DC
Nomenclature
E5DC Front panel

No. 1 display Bottom View of E5DC

Operation indicators PV or specified parameter
No.2 display
SP or specified parameter value
Press O Key once to go to Use the M Key to change to another
Adjustment Level. parameter.

Press O Key for at least 3 Use the U D Keys to Bottom-

seconds to go to Initial set the parameter. panel Setup
Setting Level. Tool port

Use S Key to change the digit (default setting). Front-panel Setup Tool port

Dimensions (Unit: mm)

Controllers
E5DC (85)
4 81
22.5 22.5

96 35 110 91

Mounting Adapter
(Accessory: Sold separately)
The above figure shows the
Terminal Unit attached to
• Setup Tool ports are provided as standard feature. Use these ports to connect a computer to
the Main Unit. the Digital Temperature Controller. The E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable is required
to connect to the port on the bottom panel. The E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable and
E58-CIFQ2-E Communications Conversion Cable are required to connect to the port on the
front panel. (You cannot leave either port connected constantly during operation.)

Mounted Separately Two-Unit Mounting Group Mounted

(22.5 × number of units) +1.0
0
22.7 +0.3
0 45 +0.6
0

92 +0.8
0 92 +0.8 92 +0.8
0 0

120 min

• Recommended panel thickness is 1 to 8 mm.

• Group mounting is not possible in the vertical direction. (Maintain the specified mounting space between Controllers.)
• When two or more Digital Temperature Controllers are mounted, make sure that the surrounding temperature does
not exceed the allowable operating temperature specified in the specifications.

64
 E5DC
Accessories (Order Separately)
Terminal Unit
E5DC-SCT1S

22.5 30.7

91 35

USB-Serial Conversion Cable

E58-CIFQ2
(2110)
250 263 1510

LED (RD)

USB connector
(type A plug)
LED (PWR) Serial connector

LED (SD)

Conversion Cable
E58-CIFQ2-E
Conversion Cable Connecting to the E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable
(2110)
(1510) 250 263 1510

E58-CIFQ2 (Order separately) Conversion Cable

Note: Always use this product together with the E58-CIFQ2.

65
 E5DC

● Current Transformers
E54-CT1 Thru-current (Io) vs. Output Voltage (Eo)
21
15
2.8 (Reference Values)
5.8 dia.
E54-CT1
7.5
Maximum continuous heater current: 50 A (50/60 Hz)
Number of windings: 4002
25 3
Winding resistance: 182 
10.5 100V

Output voltage (Eo) V (r.m.s.)

Frequency: 50 Hz

40 ∞
10 Distortion
Two, 3.5 dia. 1kΩ factor
10%
1
10 3%
1%
100mV
30

E54-CT3 2.36 dia. 10 100Ω

30
12 dia.
9 1 RL=10Ω

100μV

40 × 40
10
1 10 100mA 1 10 100 1,000A
Thru-current (Io) A (r.m.s.)

Two , M3 holes (depth: 4)

Thru-current (Io) vs. Output Voltage (Eo)
15 (Reference Values)
E54-CT3
30
Maximum continuous heater current: 120 A (50/60 Hz)
(Maximum continuous heater current for an OMRON Digital Tem-
E54-CT3 Accessories perature Controller is 50 A.)
• Armature Connection Example Number of windings: 4002
Winding resistance: 80.8 
Armature
Approx. 3 dia. Plug 100V
Output voltage (Eo) V (r.m.s.)

Frequency: 50 Hz
Distortion
Lead ∞
10 factor
1kΩ
10%
500Ω 3%
1 1%
18
100mV
• Plug 100Ω
50Ω
10
RL=10Ω
Approx. 6 dia.
1

(22)
100μV

10
1 10 100mA 1 10 100 1,000A
Thru-current (Io) A (r.m.s.)

66
 E5DC

Mounting Adapters Short Bars

Y92F-53 (Two included.) Y92S-P11 (Four included.)
This accessory is not included with the Use this product to connect between terminals (for power supplies,
product. Order it separately to mount communications, etc.) when you use multiple E5DC Controllers.
the product to a panel.
27.5
34.7 2.4
22.5

12

24.8

11.8 9.4 0.8 3

5

End Plate DIN Tracks

PFP-M PFP-100N
PFP-50N
10
6.2
1.8
M4×8
pan head
screw 1
50 35.5 35.3
1.8

11.5
7.3±0.15
10 1.3
4.5
M4 spring washer 4.8
35±0.3 27±0.15

15 25 25 25 25 15 (5) * 1
10 10
1000 (500) *

* Dimensions in parentheses are for the PFP-50N.

Spacer Unit Labels

PFP-S Y92S-L2
16
5 12
The Unit Labels for the Digital Panel
Meter are used. Use either the C or F
label from the sheet.
34.8
44.3

16.5

End Cover
Y92F-54 (Two included.)
3.9 5.3

Use the End Cover when you mount the E5DC to a

panel to hide the gap between the Controller and the
96 panel.
68

67
 Programmable Temperature Controller (Digital Controller)

E5CC-T (48  48 mm)

Programmable Controllers Join the E5C Series!

Program up to 256 segments can handle a wide
variety of applications.
• Set up to 8 Programs (Patterns) with 32 Segments (Steps) Each
• The white PV display with a height of 15.2 mm improves visibility.
• High-speed sampling at 50 ms.
• Models are available with up to 3 auxiliary outputs, up to 4 event inputs,
and a transfer output to cover a wide range of applications.
• Short body with depth of only 60 mm. 48  48 mm
• Set up the Controller without wiring the power supply by connecting to E5CC-T

the computer with a Communications Conversion Cable (sold Refer to your OMRON website for the most recent
information on applicable safety standards.
separately). Setup is easy with the CX-Thermo (sold separately).
• Easy connections to a PLC with programless communications. Use Refer to Safety Precautions on page 108.

component communications to link Temperature Controllers to each

other.

Main I/O Functions

Sensor Input E5CC-T

Universal input
• Thermocouple Dual displays: PV/SV 4-digit displays
• Pt
• Analog current/voltage
Control Output 1
Indication Accuracy • Relay output
• Thermocouple input: ±0.3% • Voltage output (for driving
of PV
• Pt input: ±0.2% of PV
SSR)
• Analog input: ±0.2% of FS • Linear current output

Sampling Period Control Output 2

• 50 ms • None
• Voltage output (for driving
Event Inputs SSR)

• None Auxiliary Outputs

•2
•3
•4
• PF (shift) Key
• Temperature status display Transfer Output
Serial Communications • Operating and editing the program
• Independent heating and cooling • None
• None •1
• RS-485 PID control
• Parameter mask setting
• Display brightness setting

This datasheet is provided as a guideline for selecting products.

Be sure to refer to the following manuals for application precautions and other information required for operation before attempting
to use the product.
E5@C-T Digital Temperature Controllers Programmable Type User’s Manual (Cat. No. H185)
E5@C-T Digital Temperature Controllers Programmable Type Communications Manual (Cat. No. H186)

68
 E5CC-T
Model Number Legend and Standard Models
Model Number Legend
Models with Screw Terminal
E5CC-T @@3 @5 M -@@@ (Example: E5CC-TRX3A5M-000)

A BC D E F

A B C D E F
Model No. of Power Meaning
Control outputs Terminal Input
auxiliary supply Options
1 and 2 type type
outputs voltage
E5CC-T 48  48 mm Programmable Type
Control output 1 Control output 2
RX Relay output None
Voltage output
QX None
(for driving SSR)
*1 CX Linear current output *2 None
Voltage output Voltage output
QQ
(for driving SSR) (for driving SSR)
Voltage output
CQ Linear current output *2
(for driving SSR)
3 3 (one common)
A 100 to 240 VAC
D 24 VAC/DC
5 Screw terminal (with cover)
M Universal input
HB alarm
Communica- Event Transfer
and HS
tions inputs output
alarm
000 --- --- --- ---
*1 001 1 --- 2 ---
2 (for 3-
*1 003 phase RS-485 --- ---
heaters)
*3 004 --- RS-485 2 ---
005 --- --- 4 ---
006 --- --- 2 Provided.
*1. Options with HB and HS alarms (001 and 003) cannot be selected if a linear current output is selected for the control output.
*2. The linear current output cannot be used as a transfer output.
*3. Option 004 can be selected only when “CX” is selected for the control outputs.

Heating and Cooling Control

Using Heating and Cooling Control
A Control Output Assignment
If there is no control output 2, an auxiliary output is used as the cooling control output.
If there is a control output 2, the two control outputs are used for heating and cooling.
(It does not matter which output is used for heating and which output is used for cooling.)
B Control
If PID control is used, you can set PID control separately for heating and cooling.
This allows you to handle control systems with different heating and cooling response characteristics.

69
 E5CC-T

Optional Products (Order Separately)

USB-Serial Conversion Cable Front Covers
Model Type Model
E58-CIFQ2 Hard Front Cover Y92A-48H
Soft Front Cover Y92A-48D
Terminal Covers
Model CX-Thermo Support Software
E53-COV17 Model
E53-COV23 (3pcs) EST2-2C-MV4
Note: The Terminal Covers E53-COV23 are provided with the Digital Note: CX-Thermo version 4.61 or higher is required for the E5CC-T.
Temperature Controller. The E53-COV10 cannot be used. For the system requirements for the CX-Thermo, refer to
Refer to page 79 for the mounted dimensions. information on the EST2-2C-MV4 on the OMRON website
(www.ia.omron.com).
Waterproof Packing
Model
Y92S-P8
Note: The Waterproof Packing is provided with the Digital
Temperature Controller.

Current Transformers (CTs)

Hole diameter Model
5.8 mm E54-CT1
12.0 mm E54-CT3

Adapter
Model
Y92F-45
Note: Use this Adapter when the panel has already been prepared for
an E5B@ Controller.

Waterproof Cover
Model
Y92A-48N

Mounting Adapter
Model
Y92F-49
Note: This Mounting Adapter is provided with the Digital Temperature
Controller.

DIN Track Mounting Adapter

Model
Y92F-52

70
 E5CC-T
Specifications
Ratings
A in model number: 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Power supply voltage
D in model number: 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz; 24 VDC
Operating voltage range 85 to 110% of rated supply voltage
Power consumption 7.5 VA max. at 100 to 240 VAC, and 4.1 VA max. at 24 VAC or 2.3 W max. at 24 VDC
Temperature input
Thermocouple: K, J, T, E, L, U, N, R, S, B, W, or PL II
Platinum resistance thermometer: Pt100 or JPt100
Sensor input Infrared temperature sensor (ES1B): 10 to 70°C, 60 to 120°C, 115 to 165°C, or 140 to 260°C
Analog input
Current input: 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 20 mA
Voltage input: 1 to 5 V, 0 to 5 V, or 0 to 10 V
Current input: 150  max., Voltage input: 1 M min.
Input impedance
(Use a 1:1 connection when connecting the ES2-HB/THB.)
Control method 2-PID control (with auto-tuning) or ON/OFF control
SPST-NO, 250 VAC, 3 A (resistive load), electrical life: 100,000 operations, minimum applicable load:
Relay output
5 V, 10 mA (reference value)
Control
Voltage output
output Output voltage: 12 VDC 20% (PNP), max. load current: 21 mA, with short-circuit protection circuit
(for driving SSR)
Linear current output 4 to 20 mA DC/0 to 20 mA DC, load: 500  max., resolution: approx. 10,000
Number of outputs 3
Auxiliary
output SPST-NO relay outputs, 250 VAC, Models with 3 outputs: 2 A (resistive load), Electrical life: 100,000
Output specifications
operations, Minimum applicable load: 10 mA at 5 V (reference value)
Number of inputs 2 or 4 (depends on model)
Contact input: ON: 1 k max., OFF: 100 k min.
Event input External contact input
Non-contact input: ON: Residual voltage: 1.5 V max., OFF: Leakage current: 0.1 mA max.
specifications
Current flow: Approx. 7 mA per contact
Number of outputs 1 (only on models with a transfer output)
Transfer
output Current output: 4 to 20 mA DC, load: 500  max., resolution: approx. 10,000
Output specifications
Linear voltage output: 1 to 5 VDC, load: 1 k min., resolution: Approx. 10,000
Setting method Digital setting using front panel keys
11-segment digital display and individual indicators
Indication method
Character height: PV: 15.2 mm, SV: 7.1 mm
Bank switching None
Manual output, heating/cooling control, loop burnout alarm, other alarm functions, heater burnout (HB)
alarm (including SSR failure (HS) alarm), 40% AT, 100% AT, MV limiter, input digital filter, robust
Other functions
tuning, PV input shift, protection functions, extraction of square root, MV change rate limit, logic
operations, temperature status display, moving average of input value, and display brightness setting
10 to 55C (with no condensation or icing), For 3-year warranty: 10 to 50C with standard mounting
Ambient operating temperature
(with no condensation or icing)
Ambient operating humidity 25 to 85%
Storage temperature 25 to 65C (with no condensation or icing)
Altitude 2,000 m max.
Recommended fuse T2A, 250 VAC, time-lag, low-breaking capacity
Installation environment Overvoltage category II, Pollution Degree 2 (EN/IEC/UL 61010-1)

71
 E5CC-T

Input Ranges
Thermocouple/Platinum Resistance Thermometer (Universal inputs)
Sensor Platinum resistance Infrared temperature
Thermocouple
type thermometer sensor
Sensor 10 to 60 to 115 to 140 to
Pt100 JPt100 K J T E L U N R S B W PLII 70°C 120°C 165°C 260°C
specification
2300
2300
1800
1800
1700 1700
1700
1600
1500
Temperature range (°C)

1400
1300 1300 1300
1300
1200
1100
1000
850 850 850
900
800
700
600
600
500.0 500.0 500.0
500
400.0 400 400.0 400 400.0
400
260
300
120 165
200
100.0 100.0 90
100
100
0
0.0 0.0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-100
-20.0 -100 -20.0 -100
-200
-200 -199.9 199.9 -200 -200 -199.9 -200 -200 -199.9 -200
Set value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Shaded settings are the default settings.

The applicable standards for the input types are as follows:

K, J, T, E, N, R, S, B: JIS C 1602-1995, IEC 60584-1 JPt100: JIS C 1604-1989, JIS C 1606-1989
L: Fe-CuNi, DIN 43710-1985 Pt100: JIS C 1604-1997, IEC 60751
U: Cu-CuNi, DIN 43710-1985 PL II: According to Platinel II electromotive force charts from BASF (previously Engelhard)
W: W5Re/W26Re, ASTM E988-1990

Analog input
Input type Current Voltage
Input
4 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA 1 to 5 V 0 to 5 V 0 to 10 V
specification
Usable in the following ranges by scaling:
Setting range -1999 to 9999, -199.9 to 999.9,
-19.99 to 99.99 or -1.999 to 9.999
Set value 25 26 27 28 29

72
 E5CC-T

Alarm Types
Each alarm can be independently set to one of the following 17 alarm types. The default is 2: Upper limit. (see note.)
Auxiliary outputs are allocated for alarms. ON delays and OFF delays (0 to 999 s) can also be specified.
Note: In the default settings for models with HB or HS alarms, alarm 1 is set to a heater alarm (HA) and the Alarm Type 1 parameter is not displayed.
To use alarm 1, set the output assignment to alarm 1.

Alarm output operation

Set
Alarm type When alarm value X When alarm value X Description of function
value
is positive is negative
0 Alarm function OFF Output OFF No alarm
Set the upward deviation in the set point for the alarm upper
L H
ON limit (H) and the lower deviation in the set point for the alarm
1 Upper- and lower-limit *1 OFF PV
* 2
SP lower limit (L). The alarm is ON when the PV is outside this
deviation range.
X X Set the upward deviation in the set point by setting the alarm
2 ON ON
Upper-limit OFF PV OFF PV value (X). The alarm is ON when the PV is higher than the
(default) SP SP
SP by the deviation or more.
X X Set the downward deviation in the set point by setting the
ON ON
3 Lower-limit OFF PV OFF PV alarm value (X). The alarm is ON when the PV is lower than
SP SP
the SP by the deviation or more.
Set the upward deviation in the set point for the alarm upper
L H
Upper- and lower-limit ON limit (H) and the lower deviation in the set point for the alarm
4 OFF PV * 3
range *1 SP lower limit (L). The alarm is ON when the PV is inside this
deviation range.
L H
Upper- and lower-limit with ON A standby sequence is added to the upper- and lower-limit
5 OFF PV *4
standby sequence *1 *5 SP alarm (1). *6
X X
Upper-limit with standby ON ON
6 OFF PV OFF PV A standby sequence is added to the upper-limit alarm (2). *6
sequence SP SP

X X
Lower-limit with standby ON ON
7 OFF PV OFF PV A standby sequence is added to the lower-limit alarm (3). *6
sequence SP SP

X X
Absolute-value upper- ON ON The alarm will turn ON if the process value is larger than the
8 OFF PV OFF PV
limit 0 0 alarm value (X) regardless of the set point.
X X
ON ON The alarm will turn ON if the process value is smaller than the
9 Absolute-value lower-limit OFF PV OFF PV
0 0 alarm value (X) regardless of the set point.
Absolute-value upper- X X
ON ON A standby sequence is added to the absolute-value upper-
10 limit with standby OFF PV OFF PV
0 0 limit alarm (8). *6
sequence
X X
Absolute-value lower-limit ON ON A standby sequence is added to the absolute-value lower-
11 OFF PV OFF PV
with standby sequence 0 0 limit alarm (9). *6
12 LBA (alarm 1 type only) - *7
13 PV change rate alarm - *8
X X
SP absolute-value ON ON This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the set point (SP)
14 OFF SP OFF SP
upper-limit alarm 0 0 is higher than the alarm value (X).
X X
SP absolute-value ON ON This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the set point (SP)
15 OFF SP OFF SP
lower-limit alarm 0 0 is lower than the alarm value (X).
Standard Control Standard Control
X X
ON ON
OFF MV OFF MV
0 0
MV absolute-value This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the manipulated
16 Heating/Cooling
upper-limit alarm *9 Heating/Cooling variable (MV) is higher than the alarm value (X).
Control (Heating MV) Control (Heating MV)
X
ON
OFF
0
MV Always ON
Standard Control Standard Control
X X
ON ON
OFF MV OFF MV
0 0
MV absolute-value This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the manipulated
17 Heating/Cooling Heating/Cooling
lower-limit alarm *9 variable (MV) is lower than the alarm value (X).
Control (Cooling MV) Control (Cooling MV)
X
ON
OFF
0
MV Always ON

73
 E5CC-T

*1. With set values 1, 4 and 5, the upper and lower limit values can *4. Set value: 5, Upper- and lower-limit with standby sequence
be set independently for each alarm type, and are expressed as For Upper- and Lower-Limit Alarm Described Above *2
“L” and “H.” • Case 1 and 2
*2. Set value: 1, Upper- and lower-limit alarm Always OFF when the upper-limit and lower-limit hysteresis overlaps.
Case 1 Case 2 Case 3 (Always ON)
H<0, L<0
• Case 3: Always OFF
L H SP SP L H H SP L *5. Set value: 5, Upper- and lower-limit with standby sequence
H<0, L>0 Always OFF when the upper-limit and lower-limit hysteresis
H<0, L>0 H>0, L<0
H L SP |H| ≥ |L| overlaps.
|H| < |L| |H| > |L|
H>0, L<0 *6. Refer to the E5@C-T Digital Temperature Controllers
SP H L |H| ≤ |L| Programmable Type User's Manual (Cat. No. H185) for
*3. Set value: 4, Upper- and lower-limit range information on the operation of the standby sequence.
Case 1 Case 2 Case 3 (Always OFF)
*7. Refer to the E5@C-T Digital Temperature Controllers
H<0, L<0 Programmable Type User's Manual (Cat. No. H185) for
L H SP SP L H H SP L information on the loop burnout alarm (LBA).
H<0, L>0 H>0, L<0 H<0, L>0 *8. Refer to the E5@C-T Digital Temperature Controllers
|H| < |L| |H| > |L| H L SP |H| ≥ |L| Programmable Type User's Manual (Cat. No. H185) for
H>0, L<0 information on the PV change rate alarm.
SP H L |H| ≤ |L| *9. When heating/cooling control is performed, the MV absolute
upper limit alarm functions only for the heating operation and the
MV absolute lower limit alarm functions only for the cooling
operation.

74
 E5CC-T

Characteristics
Thermocouple: (0.3% of indication value or 1°C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max. *1
Indication accuracy Platinum resistance thermometer: (0.2% of indication value or 0.8°C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max.
(at the ambient temperature of 23°C) Analog input: 0.2% FS 1 digit max.
CT input: 5% FS 1 digit max.
Transfer output accuracy 0.3% FS max.
Influence of temperature *2 Thermocouple input (R, S, B, W, PL II): (1% of indication value or 10°C, whichever is greater) 1 digit
max.
Influence of voltage *2 Other thermocouple input: (1% of indication value or 4°C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max. *3
Platinum resistance thermometer: (1% of indication value or 2°C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max.
Influence of EMS. Analog input: 1%FS 1 digit max.
(at EN 61326-1) CT input: 5% FS 1 digit max.
Input sampling period 50 ms
Temperature input: 0.1 to 999.9°C or °F (in units of 0.1°C or °F)
Hysteresis
Analog input: 0.01% to 99.99% FS (in units of 0.01% FS)
Temperature input: 0.1 to 999.9°C or °F (in units of 0.1°C or °F)
Proportional band (P)
Analog input: 0.1% to 999.9% FS (in units of 0.1% FS)
Integral time (I) 0 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.0 to 999.9 s (in units of 0.1 s) *4
Derivative time (D) 0 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.0 to 999.9 s (in units of 0.1 s) *4
Temperature input: 0.1 to 999.9°C or °F (in units of 0.1°C or °F)
Proportional band (P) for cooling
Analog input: 0.1% to 999.9% FS (in units of 0.1% FS)
Integral time (I) for cooling 0 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.0 to 999.9 s (in units of 0.1 s) *4
Derivative time (D) for cooling 0 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.0 to 999.9 s (in units of 0.1 s) *4
Control period 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1 to 99 s (in units of 1 s)
Manual reset value 0.0 to 100.0% (in units of 0.1%)
Alarm setting range -1999 to 9999 (decimal point position depends on input type)
Thermocouple: 0.1°C/ max. (100 max.)
Influence of signal source resistance
Platinum resistance thermometer: 0.1°C/ max. (10  max.)
Insulation resistance 20 M min. (at 500 VDC)
Dielectric strength 3,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between terminals of different charge
Malfunction 10 to 55 Hz, 20 m/s2 for 10 min each in X, Y, and Z directions
Vibration
Resistance 10 to 55 Hz, 20 m/s2 for 2 hrs each in X, Y, and Z directions
Malfunction 100 m/s2, 3 times each in X, Y, and Z directions
Shock
Resistance 300 m/s2, 3 times each in X, Y, and Z directions
Weight Controller: Approx. 120 g, Adapter: Approx. 10 g
Degree of protection Front panel: IP66, Rear case: IP20, Terminals: IP00
Memory protection Non-volatile memory (number of writes: 1,000,000 times)
Setup Tool CX-Thermo version 4.61 or higher
E5CC-T top panel: An E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable is used to connect to a USB port on
Setup Tool port
the computer. *5
cULus: UL 61010-1/CSA C22.2 No.61010-1, Korean wireless regulations (Radio law: KC Mark) (Some
Approved standards
Standards models only.) *6
Conformed standards EN 61010-1 (IEC 61010-1)
EMI: EN 61326-1 *7
Radiated Interference Electromagnetic Field Strength: EN 55011 Group 1, class A
Noise Terminal Voltage: EN 55011 Group 1, class A
EMS: EN 61326-1 *7
ESD Immunity: EN 61000-4-2
EMC
Electromagnetic Field Immunity: EN 61000-4-3
Burst Noise Immunity: EN 61000-4-4
Conducted Disturbance Immunity: EN 61000-4-6
Surge Immunity: EN 61000-4-5
Voltage Dip/Interrupting Immunity: EN 61000-4-11
*1. The indication accuracy of K thermocouples in the 200 to 1300C range, T and N thermocouples at a temperature of 100C max., and U
and L thermocouples at any temperatures is 2C 1 digit max. The indication accuracy of the B thermocouple at a temperature of 400°C max.
is not specified. The indication accuracy of B thermocouples at a temperature of 400 to 800C is 3C max. The indication accuracy of the R
and S thermocouples at a temperature of 200C max. is 3C 1 digit max. The indication accuracy of W thermocouples is (0.3% of PV or
3C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max. The indication accuracy of PL II thermocouples is (0.3% of PV or 2C, whichever is greater) 1
digit max.
*2. Ambient temperature: 10°C to 23C to 55C, Voltage range: 15% to 10% of rated voltage
*3. K thermocouple at 100C max.: 10C max.
*4. The unit is determined by the setting of the Integral/Derivative Time Unit parameter.
*5. External communications (RS-485) and USB-serial conversion cable communications can be used at the same time.
*6. Refer to your OMRON website for the most recent information on applicable models.
*7. Industrial electromagnetic environment (EN/IEC 61326-1 Table 2)

75
 E5CC-T

Program Control
Number of programs (patterns) 8
Number of segments (steps) 32
Time setting (Segment set with set point and time.)
Segment setting method
Slope setting (Segment set with segment type, set point, slope, and time.)
0 h 0 min to 99 h 59 min
Segment times
0 min 0 s to 99 min 59 s
Alarm setting Set separately for each program.
Reset operation Select either stopping control or fixed SP operation.
Startup operation Select continuing, resetting, manual operation, or run mode.
Number of sets 8
PID sets
Setting method Set separately for each program (automatic PID group selection also supported).
Alarm SP function Select from ramp SP and target SP.
Segment operation Advance, segment jump, hold, and wait
Program status control
Program operation Program repetitions and program links
Wait method Waiting at segment ends
Wait operation
Wait width setting Same wait width setting for all programs
Number of outputs 2
Number of ON/OFF
Time signals 1 each per output
Operations
Setting method Set separately for each program.
Program status output Program end output (pulse width can be set), run output, stage output
PV start Select from segment 1 set point, slope-priority PV start
Program startup operation 0 h 0 min to 99 h 59 min
Standby
0 day 0 h to 99 day 23h
Operation end operation Select from resetting, continuing control at final set point, and fixed SP control.
Program SP shift Same program SP shift for all programs

76
 E5CC-T

USB-Serial Conversion Cable When Digital Temperature Controllers are

connected, set points and RUN/STOP
Applicable OS Windows XP/Vista/7/8/10 *1 commands can be sent from the Digital
Applicable software CX-Thermo version 4.61 or higher Temperature Controller that is set as the
Component
Applicable models E5@C-T Series, E5@C Series, and E5CB Series master to the Digital Temperature
Communications
Controllers that are set as slaves.
USB interface standard Conforms to USB Specification 2.0.
Slope and offsets can be set for the set point.
DTE speed 38400 bps Number of connected Digital Temperature
Computer: USB (type A plug) Controllers: 32 max. (including master)
Connector
Digital Temperature Controller: When Digital Temperature Controllers are
specifications
Special serial connector connected, the parameters can be copied
Bus power (Supplied from USB host Copying * from the Digital Temperature Controller that is
Power supply
controller.) *2 set as the master to the Digital Temperature
Power supply voltage 5 VDC Controllers that are set as slaves.
Current consumption 450 mA max. MELSEC is a registered trademark of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.
* Both the programless communications and the component
4.70.2 VDC
communications support the copying.
Output voltage (Supplied from USB-Serial Conversion
Cable to the Digital Temperature Controller.)
250 mA max.
Current Transformer (Order Separately)
Output current (Supplied from USB-Serial Conversion Ratings
Cable to the Digital Temperature Controller.)
Dielectric strength 1,000 VAC for 1 min
Ambient operating
0 to 55°C (with no condensation or icing) Vibration resistance 50 Hz, 98 m/s2
temperature
E54-CT1: Approx. 11.5 g,
Ambient operating Weight
10% to 80% E54-CT3: Approx. 50 g
humidity
Accessories Armatures (2)
Storage temperature -20 to 60°C (with no condensation or icing)
(E54-CT3 only) Plugs (2)
Storage humidity 10% to 80%
Altitude 2,000 m max. Heater Burnout Alarms and SSR Failure
Weight Approx. 120 g
Alarms
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and or other countries. Models with detection for single-phase
*1. CX-Thermo version 4.65 or higher runs on Windows 10. CT input (for heater heaters: One input
*2. Use a high-power port for the USB port. current detection) Models with detection for singlephase or
Note: A driver must be installed on the computer. Refer to the Instruction three-phase heaters: Two inputs
Manual included with the Cable for the installation procedure. Maximum heater
50 A AC
current
Communications Specifications Input current
5% FS 1 digit max.
indication accuracy
Transmission line
RS-485: Multidrop Heater burnout alarm 0.1 to 49.9 A (in units of 0.1 A)
connection method
setting range *1 Minimum detection ON time: 100 ms *3
Communications RS-485 (two-wire, half duplex)
SSR failure alarm 0.1 to 49.9 A (in units of 0.1 A)
Synchronization method Start-stop synchronization setting range *2 Minimum detection OFF time: 100 ms *4
Protocol CompoWay/F, or Modbus *1. For heater burnout alarms, the heater current will be measured
Baud rate * 9600, 19200, 38400, or 57600 bps when the control output is ON, and the output will turn ON if the
Transmission code ASCII heater current is lower than the set value (i.e., heater burnout
detection current value).
Data bit length * 7 or 8 bits
*2. For SSR failure alarms, the heater current will be measured when
Stop bit length * 1 or 2 bits the control output is OFF, and the output will turn ON if the heater
Vertical parity (none, even, odd) current is higher than the set value (i.e., SSR failure detection
Error detection Block check character (BCC) with current value).
CompoWay/F or CRC-16 Modbus *3. The value is 30 ms for a control period of 0.1 s or 0.2 s.
Flow control None *4. The value is 35 ms for a control period of 0.1 s or 0.2 s.
Interface RS-485
Retry function None
Electrical Life Expectancy Curve for
Communications buffer 217 bytes Relays (Reference Values)
Communications 0 to 99 ms
Life (× 104 operations)

500
response wait time Default: 20 ms 300
* The baud rate, data bit length, stop bit length, and vertical parity can
be individually set using the Communications Setting Level.
100

Communications Functions 50
30
You can use the memory in the PLC to read and
write E5@C-T parameters, start and reset
operation, etc. The E5@C-T automatically
10
performs communications with PLCs. No
communications programming is required. 5
Number of connected Digital Temperature E5CC-T
Programless 3 250 VAC, 30 VDC
Controllers: 32 max.
communications * Applicable PLCs
(resistive load)
cosφ = 1
OMRON PLCs
1
CS Series, CJ Series, or 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
CP Series
Mitsubishi Electric PLCs Switching current (A)
MELSEC Q Series, L Series

77
 E5CC-T
External Connections
E5CC-T
Control output 1
Relay output
250 VAC, 3 A E5CC T 3 5M
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
(resistive load)
Voltage output Terminal type
(for driving SSR)
12 VDC, 21 mA Auxiliary outputs
Control output 2 The E5CC-T is set for a K-type thermocouple (input
Linear current output Relay output
0 to 20 mA DC Voltage output type = 5) by default. An input error (s.err) will occur
Models with 3 auxiliary outputs:
4 to 20 mA DC (for driving SSR) if the input type setting does not agree with the
250 VAC: 2 A
Load: 500 Ω max. 12 VDC, 21 mA (resistive load) temperature sensor. Check the input type.

(1) Control outputs 1, 2

RX QX CX QQ CQ
Models with Models with 1 Models with 1 Models with 2 Models with 2 Outputs:
1 Relay Voltage Output Linear Current Voltage Outputs Linear Current Output
Output (for Driving SSR) Output (for Driving SSR) and Voltage (for Driving SSR)
(2) Auxiliary Outputs
OUT1 OUT1 OUT1 OUT1 OUT1
1 1 +Q 1 + C 1 +Q 1 + C Auxiliary outputs 1, 2, and 3
R
2 2 − 2 − 2 − OUT2 2 - OUT2
+Q 7
3 3 3 3 3 + Q Auxiliary output 3
8
Auxiliary output 2
9
Auxiliary output 1
1 13 7 10
2 14 8
(5) Sensor (Temperature/Analog) Input 3 15 9
(3) Input Power Supply
4 16 10
TC Pt I V 100 to 240 VAC 24 VAC/DC
A 5 17 11
4 4 + 4 4
6 18 12
11 11
− 5 B
5
mA
5 − 5
B − V 12 12
+ 6 6 6
+
6
(no polarity)

(6) Options
001 003 004 005 006
Event inputs 1 and 2, Communications Communications (RS-485) Event inputs 1 to 4 Event inputs 1 and 2, and
and CT1 (RS-485), CT1, and CT2 and event inputs 3 and 4 transfer output
(−) B(+) B(+) (−)
13 13 13 (−) 13 13
RS-485 RS-485
14 14 14 14 14
EV1 A(−) A(−) EV1 EV1
EV2 15 15 15 EV2
15 EV2
15
16 16 (−)
16 (−) 16 16 +
CT1
17
CT1
COM 17 17 17 17 +V Transfer output
CT2 EV3 EV3 I
18 18 EV4 18 18 18 −
EV4

Use no-voltage inputs for the event inputs.

The polarity for non-contact inputs is given in parentheses.

Note: 1. The application of the terminals depends on the model.

2. Do not wire the terminals that are shown with a gray background.
3. When complying with EMC standards, the cable that connects the sensor must be 30 m or less.
If the cable length exceeds 30 m, compliance with EMC standards will not be possible.
4. Connect M3 crimped terminals.

Isolation/Insulation Block Diagrams

Models with 3 Auxiliary Outputs

Sensor input and CT inputs

Communications and event inputs

Power Voltage output (for driving SSR),

supply linear current output, and transfer output

Relay output

Auxiliary outputs 1, 2, 3

: Reinforced insulation

: Functional isolation

Note: Auxiliary outputs 1 to 3 are not insulated.

78
 E5CC-T
Nomenclature
E5CC-T Front panel
Temperature unit

Operation indicators No. 1 display

PV or specified monitor/setting parameter
Top View of E5CC-T
No. 2 display
Press O Key once to go to SP or specified monitor/parameter value
Program Setting Level.
Top-panel Setup Tool port
Press O Key for at least 3
seconds to go to Initial Setting
Level. Use the UD Keys to set the
parameter.

Use the M Key to change to another parameter. Press U Key for at least 1 second
when Process value/Set point
Press M and D Keys simultaneously for at parameter are displayed in Program
least 1 second to switch between run and reset SP Mode to go to Display Segment
status. Selection parameter in Program
Setting Level.

Use S Key to change the digit (default setting).

Dimensions (Unit: mm)

Controllers
E5CC-T
Panel Cutout
Mounted Separately Group Mounted
(64) (48 × number of units - 2.5)+1.0
0
4 60
48 × 48 1 48 × 48

45+0.6
0

60 min. Group mounting does not

58

allow waterproofing.

45+0.6
0

Waterproof Packing Mounting Adapter 45+0.6

0
(Accessory) (Accessory)

• Recommended panel thickness is 1 to 5 mm.

The Setup Tool port is on the top of the Temperature Controller.
• Group mounting is not possible in the vertical direction. (Maintain
It is used to connect the Temperature Controller to the computer
the specified mounting space between Controllers.)
to use the Setup Tool.
• To mount the Controller so that it is waterproof, insert the water-
The E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable is required to
proof packing onto the Controller.
make the connection.
• When two or more Controllers are mounted, make sure that the
Refer to the instructions that are provided with the USB-Serial
surrounding temperature does not exceed the allowable operating
Conversion Cable for the connection procedure.
temperature specified in the specifications.
Note: Do not leave the USB-Serial Conversion Cable • Use a control panel thickness of 1 to 3 mm if the Y92A-48N and a
connected when you use the Temperature Controller. USB-Serial Conversion Cable are used together.

79
 E5CC-T

Accessories (Order Separately)

USB-Serial Conversion Cable
E58-CIFQ2 (2110)
250 263 1510

LED (RD)

USB connector
(type A plug)
LED (PWR) Serial connector

LED (SD)

Terminal Covers 48 Terminal Covers

E53-COV17 E53-COV23 (Three Covers provided.)
2 3.8
48.8

10

Terminal Cover
(E53-COV23)
22 44.8

9.1

Waterproof Packing
Y92S-P8 (for DIN 48  48) The Waterproof Packing is provided with the Temperature Controller.
Order the Waterproof Packing separately if it becomes lost or damaged.
The Waterproof Packing can be used to achieve an IP66 degree of protection.
(Deterioration, shrinking, or hardening of the waterproof packing may occur depending on the
operating environment. Therefore, periodic replacement is recommended to ensure the level of
waterproofing specified in IP66. The time for periodic replacement depends on the operating
environment. Be sure to confirm this point at your site.
Consider three years as a rough standard.)

80
 E5CC-T

Current Transformers
E54-CT1 Thru-current (Io) vs. Output Voltage (Eo)
21
2.8
15 (Reference Values)
5.8 dia.
E54-CT1
7.5
Maximum continuous heater current: 50 A (50/60 Hz)
Number of windings: 4002
25 3
Winding resistance: 182 
10.5
100V

Output voltage (Eo) V (r.m.s.)

Frequency: 50 Hz
40
10 ∞ Distortion
Two, 3.5 dia. factor
1kΩ
10%
10 1
3%
1%
30 100mV

10 100Ω
E54-CT3
2.36 dia.
30 RL=10Ω
1
12 dia.
9
100μV

10
40 × 40 1 10 100mA 1 10 100 1,000A
Thru-current (Io) A (r.m.s.)

Thru-current (Io) vs. Output Voltage (Eo)

Two, M3 (depth: 4) (Reference Values)
15
E54-CT3
Maximum continuous heater current: 120 A (50/60 Hz)
30 (Maximum continuous heater current for an OMRON Dig-
ital Temperature Controller is 50 A.)
Number of windings: 4002
E54-CT3 Accessories
Winding resistance: 80.8 
• Armature Connection Example
100V
Output voltage (Eo) V (r.m.s.)

Frequency: 50 Hz
Armature Distortion
Approx. 3 dia. Plug ∞
10 factor
1kΩ
10%
Lead 500Ω 3%
1 1%

100mV
18
100Ω
50Ω
• Plug 10
RL=10Ω

1
Approx. 6 dia.

100μV
(22)
10
1 10 100mA 1 10 100 1,000A
Thru-current (Io) A (r.m.s.)

81
 E5CC-T

Adapter
Y92F-45 Note: 1. Use this Adapter when the Front Panel has already been prepared for the E5B@.
2. Only black is available.
3. You cannot use the E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable if you use the Y92F-45 Adapter. To use the USB-Serial
Conversion Cable to make the settings, do so before you mount the Temperature Controller in the panel.
4. You cannot use this Adapter together with the Y92F-49 Adapter that is provided with the E5CC-T Temperature
Controller.

Fixture (Accessory)
4.7 76
69.6 to 77.6
72 × 72

67 × 67 87

Mounted to E5CC-T Panel (1 to 8 mm) Mounting Adapter

Y92F-30
72 × 72 (Accessory)

48 × 48

2.2 4.7
62.8
To back of the E5CC-T

DIN Track Mounting Adapter

Y92F-52 Note: This Adapter cannot be used together with the Terminal Cover.
Remove the Terminal Cover to use the Adapter.

This Adapter is used to mount the

E5CC-T to a DIN Track.
61
If you use the Adapter, there is no
need for a plate to mount in the
panel or to drill mounting holes in
3.5 the panel.
50 38

Mounted to E5CC-T

48

80.5

82
 E5CC-T

Watertight Cover Mounting Adapter

Y92A-48N Y92F-49
21.9 14
The Mounting Adapter is provided with the
(2)
Temperature Controller.
Order this Adapter separately if it becomes
lost or damaged.

87.7 69
79.2

12

67.6 28.9

Protective Cover Protective Cover

Y92A-48D Note: This Protective Cover cannot be used Y92A-48H
if the Waterproof Packing is installed. This Protective Cover is hard type.
This Protective Cover is soft type. Please use it for the mis-operation
It is able to operate the controller with using prevention etc.
this cover.

83
 Programmable Temperature Controller (Digital Controller)

E5EC-T/E5AC-T (48  96 mm/96  96 mm)

Programmable Controllers Join the E5C Series!

Program up to 256 segments can handle a
wide variety of applications.
• Set up to 8 Programs (Patterns) with 32 Segments (Steps) Each
• A white LCD PV display with a height of approx. 18 mm for the E5EC-
T and 25 mm for the E5AC-T improves visibility.
• Tool ports are provided both on the top panel and the front panel. Set
up the Controller without wiring the power supply by connecting to the
computer with a Communications Conversion Cable (sold
separately). Setup is easy with the CX-Thermo (sold separately). 48  96 mm 96  96 mm
E5EC-T E5AC-T
• High-speed sampling at 50 ms.
• Models are available with up to 4 auxiliary outputs, up to 6 event Refer to your OMRON website for the most recent
information on applicable safety standards.
inputs, and a transfer output to cover a wide range of applications.
• Short body with depth of only 60 mm. Refer to Safety Precautions on page 108.
• Easy connections to a PLC with programless communications. Use
component communications to link Temperature Controllers to each
other.
• The new position-proportional control models allow you to control
valves as well.

Main I/O Functions

Sensor Input
E5EC-T E5AC-T
Universal input
• Thermocouple
Three-level Display
• Pt
Simultaneous display of the PV, SP, 4-digit
• Analog current/voltage
Program No., Segment No., etc. displays
Indication Accuracy
• Thermocouple input: ±0.3% of PV Control Output 1
• Pt input: ±0.2% of PV • Relay output
• Analog input: ±0.2% of FS • Voltage output (for driving SSR)
Sampling Period • Linear current output
• 50 ms

Control Output 2
Event Inputs
• Voltage output (for driving SSR)
• None • Relay output
•2 • Linear current output
• PF (shift) Key
•4
• Setup Tool port on front panel
•6
• Temperature status display Auxiliary Outputs
• Operating and editting the program •4
Serial Communications • Independent heating and
• None cooling PID control
Transfer Output
• RS-485 • Parameter mask setting
• Display brightness setting • None
•1

This datasheet is provided as a guideline for selecting products.

Be sure to refer to the following manuals for application precautions and other information required for operation before attempting
to use the product.
E5@C-T Digital Temperature Controllers Programmable Type User’s Manual (Cat. No. H185)
E5@C-T Digital Temperature Controllers Programmable Type Communications Manual (Cat. No. H186)

84
 E5EC-T/E5AC-T
Model Number Legend and Standard Models
Model Number Legend
Models with Screw Terminal
E5EC-T@@ 4 @ 5 M -@@@ (Example: E5EC-TRX4A5M-000)
    
A BC D E F
E5AC-T@@ 4 @ 5 M -@@@ (Example: E5AC-TRX4A5M-000)
   
A BC D E F

A B C D E F
Model No. of Power Meaning
Control outputs Terminal Input
auxiliary supply Options
1 and 2 type type
outputs voltage
E5EC-T 48  96 mm Programmable Type
E5AC-T 96  96 mm Programmable Type
Control output 1 Control output 2
RX Relay output None
Voltage output
QX None
(for driving SSR)
*2 CX Linear current output None
Voltage output Voltage output
QQ
(for driving SSR) (for driving SSR)
Voltage output
QR Relay output
(for driving SSR)
RR Relay output Relay output
*2 CC Linear current output Linear current output
Voltage output
*2 CQ Linear current output
(for driving SSR)
Position-proportional relay Position-proportional
PR
output relay output
4 (auxiliary outputs 1 and 2 with same common and
4
auxiliary outputs 3 and 4 with same common)
A 100 to 240 VAC
D 24 VAC/DC
5 Screw terminal (with cover)
Control outputs 1 and 2 M Universal input
For RX,
QX, QQ, For CX or
For PR HB alarm and Event
QR, RR, or CC Communications Transfer output
HS alarm inputs
CQ
Selectable Selectable Selectable 000 --- --- --- ---
Option
selection Selectable Selectable 004 --- RS-485 2 ---
conditions Selectable 005 --- --- 4 ---
*1 Selectable 008 1 RS-485 2 ---
Selectable 010 1 --- 4 ---
Selectable 019 1 --- 6 Provided.
Selectable 021 --- --- 6 Provided.
Selectable Selectable 022 --- RS-485 4 Provided.
*1. The options that can be selected depend on the type of control output.
*2. The linear current output cannot be used as a transfer output.

Heating and Cooling Control

Using Heating and Cooling Control
A Control Output Assignment
If there is no control output 2, an auxiliary output is used as the cooling control output.
If there is a control output 2, the two control outputs are used for heating and cooling.
(It does not matter which output is used for heating and which output is used for cooling.)
B Control
If PID control is used, you can set PID control separately for heating and cooling.
This allows you to handle control systems with different heating and cooling response characteristics.

85
 E5EC-T/E5AC-T

Optional Products (Order Separately)

USB-Serial Conversion Cable Current Transformers (CTs)
Model Hole diameter Model
E58-CIFQ2 5.8 mm E54-CT1
12.0 mm E54-CT3
Communications Conversion Cable
Model CX-Thermo Support Software
E58-CIFQ2-E Model
Note: Always use this product together with the E58-CIFQ2. EST2-2C-MV4
This Cable is used to connect to the front-panel Setup Tool Note: CX-Thermo version 4.61 or higher is required for the E5EC-T/
port. E5AC-T.
For the system requirements for the CX-Thermo, refer to
Terminal Covers information on the EST2-2C-MV4 on the OMRON website
Model (www.ia.omron.com).
E53-COV24 (3pcs)
Note: The Terminal Covers E53-COV24 are provided with the Digital
Temperature Controller.

Waterproof Packing
Applicable Controller Model
E5EC-T Y92S-P9
E5AC-T Y92S-P10
Note: This Waterproof Packing is provided with the Digital
Temperature Controller.

Waterproof Cover
Applicable Controller Model
E5EC-T Y92A-49N
E5AC-T Y92A-96N

Front Port Cover

Model
Y92S-P7
Note: This Front Port Cover is provided with the Digital Temperature
Controller.

Mounting Adapter
Model
Y92F-51 (2pcs)
Note: This Mounting Adapter is provided with the Digital Temperature
Controller.

86
 E5EC-T/E5AC-T
Specifications
Ratings
A in model number: 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Power supply voltage
D in model number: 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz; 24 VDC
Operating voltage range 85 to 110% of rated supply voltage
E5EC-T 8.7 VA max. at 100 to 240 VAC, and 5.5 VA max. at 24 VAC or 3.2 W max. at 24 VDC
Power consumption
E5AC-T 9.0 VA max. at 100 to 240 VAC, and 5.6 VA max. at 24 VAC or 3.4 W max. at 24 VDC
Temperature input
Thermocouple: K, J, T, E, L, U, N, R, S, B, W, or PL II
Platinum resistance thermometer: Pt100 or JPt100
Sensor input Infrared temperature sensor (ES1B): 10 to 70°C, 60 to 120°C, 115 to 165°C, or 140 to 260°C
Analog input
Current input: 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 20 mA
Voltage input: 1 to 5 V, 0 to 5 V, or 0 to 10 V
Current input: 150  max., Voltage input: 1 M min.
Input impedance
(Use a 1:1 connection when connecting the ES2-HB/THB.)
Control method 2-PID control (with auto-tuning) or ON/OFF control
SPST-NO, 250 VAC, 5 A (resistive load), electrical life: 100,000 operations,
Relay output
minimum applicable load: 5 V, 10 mA (reference value)
Control
Voltage output Output voltage: 12 VDC 20% (PNP), max. load current: 40 mA, with short-circuit protection circuit
output
(for driving SSR) (The maximum load current is 21 mA for models with two control outputs.)
Linear current output 4 to 20 mA DC/0 to 20 mA DC, load: 500  max., resolution: approx. 10,000
Number of outputs 4
Auxiliary
output SPST-NO. relay outputs, 250 VAC, Models with 4 outputs: 2 A (resistive load),
Output specifications
Electrical life: 100,000 operations, Minimum applicable load: 10 mA at 5 V (reference value)
Number of inputs 2, 4 or 6 (depends on model)
Contact input: ON: 1 k max., OFF: 100 k min.
Event input External contact input
Non-contact input: ON: Residual voltage: 1.5 V max., OFF: Leakage current: 0.1 mA max.
specifications
Current flow: Approx. 7 mA per contact
Number of outputs 1 (only on models with a transfer output)
Transfer
output Current output: 4 to 20 mA DC, Load: 500  max., Resolution: Approx. 10,000
Output specifications
Linear voltage output: 1 to 5 VDC, load: 1 k min., Resolution: Approx. 10,000
Potentiometer input 100  to 10 k
Setting method Digital setting using front panel keys
11-segment digital display and individual indicators
Character height: E5EC-T: PV: 18.0 mm, SV: 11.0 mm, MV: 7.8 mm
E5AC-T: PV: 25.0 mm, SV: 15.0 mm, MV: 9.5 mm
Indication method
Three displays. Contents: PV, SP, program No. and segment No., remaining segment time, or MV
(valve opening)
Numbers of digits: 4 digits
Bank switching None
Manual output, heating/cooling control, loop burnout alarm, other alarm functions, heater burnout (HB)
alarm (including SSR failure (HS) alarm), 40% AT, 100% AT, MV limiter, input digital filter, robust
Other functions
tuning, PV input shift, protection functions, extraction of square root, MV change rate limit, logic
operations, temperature status display, moving average of input value, and display brightness setting
10 to 55C (with no condensation or icing), For 3-year warranty: 10 to 50C with standard mounting
Ambient operating temperature
(with no condensation or icing)
Ambient operating humidity 25 to 85%
Storage temperature 25 to 65C (with no condensation or icing)
Altitude 2,000 m max.
Recommended fuse T2A, 250 VAC, time-lag, low-breaking capacity
Installation environment Overvoltage category II, Pollution Degree 2 (EN/IEC/UL 61010-1)

87
 E5EC-T/E5AC-T

Input Ranges
Thermocouple/Platinum Resistance Thermometer (Universal inputs)
Sensor Platinum resistance Infrared temperature
Thermocouple
type thermometer sensor
Sensor 10 to 60 to 115 to 140 to
Pt100 JPt100 K J T E L U N R S B W PLII 70°C 120°C 165°C 260°C
specification
2300
2300
1800
1800
1700 1700
1700
1600
1500
1400
1300 1300 1300
Temperature range (°C)

1300
1200
1100
1000
850 850 850
900
800
700
600
600
500.0 500.0 500.0
500
400.0 400 400.0 400 400.0
400
260
300
120 165
200
100.0 100.0 90
100
100
0
0.0 0.0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-100
-20.0 -100 -20.0 -100
-200
-200 -199.9 199.9 -200 -200 -199.9 -200 -200 -199.9 -200
Set value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Shaded settings are the default settings.

The applicable standards for the input types are as follows:

K, J, T, E, N, R, S, B: JIS C 1602-1995, IEC 60584-1 JPt100: JIS C 1604-1989, JIS C 1606-1989
L: Fe-CuNi, DIN 43710-1985 Pt100: JIS C 1604-1997, IEC 60751
U: Cu-CuNi, DIN 43710-1985 PL II: According to Platinel II electromotive force charts from BASF (previously Engelhard)
W: W5Re/W26Re, ASTM E988-1990

Analog input
Input type Current Voltage
Input
4 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA 1 to 5 V 0 to 5 V 0 to 10 V
specification
Usable in the following ranges by scaling:
Setting range -1999 to 9999, -199.9 to 999.9,
-19.99 to 99.99 or -1.999 to 9.999
Set value 25 26 27 28 29

88
 E5EC-T/E5AC-T

Alarm Types
Each alarm can be independently set to one of the following 17 alarm types. The default is 2: Upper limit. (see note.)
Auxiliary outputs are allocated for alarms. ON delays and OFF delays (0 to 999 s) can also be specified.
Note: In the default settings for models with HB or HS alarms, alarm 1 is set to a heater alarm (HA) and the Alarm Type 1 parameter is not displayed.
To use alarm 1, set the output assignment to alarm 1.

Alarm output operation

Set
Alarm type When alarm value X When alarm value X Description of function
value
is positive is negative
0 Alarm function OFF Output OFF No alarm
Set the upward deviation in the set point for the alarm upper
L H limit (H) and the lower deviation in the set point for the alarm
ON
1 Upper- and lower-limit *1 OFF PV
* 2
SP lower limit (L). The alarm is ON when the PV is outside this
deviation range.
X X Set the upward deviation in the set point by setting the alarm
2 ON ON
Upper-limit OFF PV OFF PV
value (X). The alarm is ON when the PV is higher than the
(default) SP SP
SP by the deviation or more.
X X Set the downward deviation in the set point by setting the
ON ON
3 Lower-limit OFF PV OFF PV
alarm value (X). The alarm is ON when the PV is lower than
SP SP
the SP by the deviation or more.
Set the upward deviation in the set point for the alarm upper
Upper- and lower-limit L H limit (H) and the lower deviation in the set point for the alarm
ON
4 OFF PV
* 3
range *1 SP lower limit (L). The alarm is ON when the PV is inside this
deviation range.
L H
Upper- and lower-limit with ON A standby sequence is added to the upper- and lower-limit
5 OFF PV *4
standby sequence *1 *5 SP alarm (1). *6
X X
Upper-limit with standby ON ON
6 OFF PV OFF PV A standby sequence is added to the upper-limit alarm (2). *6
sequence SP SP

X X
Lower-limit with standby ON ON
7 OFF PV OFF PV A standby sequence is added to the lower-limit alarm (3). *6
sequence SP SP

X X
Absolute-value upper- ON ON The alarm will turn ON if the process value is larger than the
8 OFF PV OFF PV
limit 0 0 alarm value (X) regardless of the set point.
X X
ON ON The alarm will turn ON if the process value is smaller than the
9 Absolute-value lower-limit OFF PV OFF PV
0 0 alarm value (X) regardless of the set point.
Absolute-value upper- X X
ON ON A standby sequence is added to the absolute-value upper-
10 limit with standby OFF PV OFF PV
0 0 limit alarm (8). *6
sequence
X X
Absolute-value lower-limit ON ON A standby sequence is added to the absolute-value lower-
11 OFF PV OFF PV
with standby sequence 0 0 limit alarm (9). *6
12 LBA (alarm 1 type only) - *7
13 PV change rate alarm - *8
X X
SP absolute-value ON ON This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the set point (SP)
14 OFF SP OFF SP
upper-limit alarm 0 0 is higher than the alarm value (X).
X X
SP absolute-value ON ON This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the set point (SP)
15 OFF SP OFF SP
lower-limit alarm 0 0 is lower than the alarm value (X).
Standard Control Standard Control
X X
ON ON
OFF MV OFF MV
0 0
MV absolute-value This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the manipulated
16 Heating/Cooling
upper-limit alarm *9 Heating/Cooling variable (MV) is higher than the alarm value (X).
Control (Heating MV) Control (Heating MV)
X
ON
OFF
0
MV Always ON
Standard Control Standard Control
X X
ON ON
OFF MV OFF MV
0 0
MV absolute-value This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the manipulated
17 Heating/Cooling Heating/Cooling
lower-limit alarm *9 variable (MV) is lower than the alarm value (X).
Control (Cooling MV) Control (Cooling MV)
X
ON
OFF
0
MV Always ON

89
 E5EC-T/E5AC-T

*1. With set values 1, 4 and 5, the upper and lower limit values can *4. Set value: 5, Upper- and lower-limit with standby sequence
be set independently for each alarm type, and are expressed as For Upper- and Lower-Limit Alarm Described Above *2
“L” and “H.” • Case 1 and 2
*2. Set value: 1, Upper- and lower-limit alarm Always OFF when the upper-limit and lower-limit hysteresis overlaps.
Case 1 Case 2 Case 3 (Always ON)
H<0, L<0
• Case 3: Always OFF
L H SP SP L H H SP L *5. Set value: 5, Upper- and lower-limit with standby sequence
H<0, L>0 Always OFF when the upper-limit and lower-limit hysteresis
H<0, L>0 H>0, L<0
H L SP |H| ≥ |L| overlaps.
|H| < |L| |H| > |L|
H>0, L<0 *6. Refer to the E5@C-T Digital Temperature Controllers
SP H L |H| ≤ |L| Programmable Type User's Manual (Cat. No. H185) for
*3. Set value: 4, Upper- and lower-limit range information on the operation of the standby sequence.
Case 1 Case 2 Case 3 (Always OFF)
*7. Refer to the E5@C-T Digital Temperature Controllers
H<0, L<0 Programmable Type User's Manual (Cat. No. H185) for
L H SP SP L H H SP L information on the loop burnout alarm (LBA). This setting cannot
H<0, L>0 H>0, L<0 H<0, L>0 be used with a position-proportional model.
|H| < |L| |H| > |L| H L SP |H| ≥ |L| *8. Refer to the E5@C-T Digital Temperature Controllers
H>0, L<0 Programmable Type User's Manual (Cat. No. H185) for
SP H L |H| ≤ |L| information on the PV change rate alarm.
*9. When heating/cooling control is performed, the MV absolute
upper limit alarm functions only for the heating operation and the
MV absolute lower limit alarm functions only for the cooling
operation.

90
 E5EC-T/E5AC-T

Characteristics
Thermocouple: (0.3% of indication value or 1°C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max. *1
Indication accuracy Platinum resistance thermometer: (0.2% of indication value or 0.8°C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max.
(at the ambient temperature of Analog input: 0.2% FS 1 digit max.
23°C) CT input: 5% FS 1 digit max.
Potentiometer input: 5% FS 1 digit max.
Transfer output accuracy 0.3% FS max.

Influence of temperature *2 Thermocouple input (R, S, B, W, PL II): (1% of indication value or 10°C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max.
Other thermocouple input: (1% of indication value or 4°C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max. *3
Influence of voltage *2 Platinum resistance thermometer: (1% of indication value or 2°C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max.
Analog input: 1%FS 1 digit max.
Influence of EMS. CT input: 5% FS 1 digit max.
(at EN 61326-1)
Input sampling period 50ms
Temperature input: 0.1 to 999.9°C or °F (in units of 0.1°C or°F)
Hysteresis
Analog input: 0.01% to 99.99% FS (in units of 0.01% FS)
Temperature input: 0.1 to 999.9°C or °F (in units of 0.1°C or °F)
Proportional band (P)
Analog input: 0.1 to 999.9% FS (in units of 0.1% FS)
Standard, heating/cooling, or Position-proportional (Close): 0 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.0 to 999.9 s (in
Integral time (I) units of 0.1 s)
Position-proportional (Floating): 1 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.1 to 999.9 s (in units of 0.1 s) *4
Derivative time (D) 0 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.0 to 999.9 s (in units of 0.1 s) *4
Temperature input: 0.1 to 999.9°C or °F (in units of 0.1°C or °F)
Proportional band (P) for cooling
Analog input: 0.1 to 999.9% FS (in units of 0.1% FS)
Integral time (I) for cooling 0 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.0 to 999.9 s (in units of 0.1 s) *4
Derivative time (D) for cooling 0 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.0 to 999.9 s (in units of 0.1 s) *4
Control period 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1 to 99 s (in units of 1 s)
Manual reset value 0.0 to 100.0% (in units of 0.1%)
Alarm setting range -1999 to 9999 (decimal point position depends on input type)
Influence of signal source Thermocouple: 0.1°C/ max. (100  max.)
resistance Platinum resistance thermometer: 0.1°C/ max. (10  max.)
Insulation resistance 20 M min. (at 500 VDC)
Dielectric strength 3,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between terminals of different charge
Malfunction 10 to 55 Hz, 20 m/s2 for 10 min each in X, Y, and Z directions
Vibration
Resistance 10 to 55 Hz, 20 m/s2 for 2 hrs each in X, Y, and Z directions
Malfunction 100 m/s2, 3 times each in X, Y, and Z directions
Shock
Resistance 300 m/s2, 3 times each in X, Y, and Z directions
E5EC-T Controller: Approx. 210 g, Adapter: Approx. 4 g  2
Weight
E5AC-T Controller: Approx. 250 g, Adapter: Approx. 4 g  2
Degree of protection Front panel: IP66, Rear case: IP20, Terminals: IP00
Memory protection Non-volatile memory (number of writes: 1,000,000 times)
Setup Tool CX-Thermo version 4.61 or higher
E5EC-T/E5AC-T top panel: An E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable is used to connect to a USB
port on the computer.*5
Setup Tool port
E5EC-T/E5AC-T front panel: An E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable and E58-CIFQ2-E Conversion
Cable are used together to connect to a USB port on the computer.*5
cULus: UL 61010-1/CSA C22.2 No.61010-1, Korean wireless regulations (Radio law: KC Mark) (Some
Approved standards
Standards models only.) *6
Conformed standards EN 61010-1 (IEC 61010-1)
EMI EN 61326-1 *7
Radiated Interference Electromagnetic Field Strength: EN 55011 Group 1, class A
Noise Terminal Voltage: EN 55011 Group 1, class A
EMS: EN 61326-1 *7
ESD Immunity: EN 61000-4-2
EMC
Electromagnetic Field Immunity: EN 61000-4-3
Burst Noise Immunity: EN 61000-4-4
Conducted Disturbance Immunity: EN 61000-4-6
Surge Immunity: EN 61000-4-5
Voltage Dip/Interrupting Immunity: EN 61000-4-11
*1. The indication accuracy of K thermocouples in the -200 to 1300°C range, T and N thermocouples at a temperature of -100°C max., and U and
L thermocouples at any temperatures is 2°C 1 digit max. The indication accuracy of the B thermocouple at a temperature of 400°C max.
is not specified. The indication accuracy of B thermocouples at a temperature of 400 to 800°C is 3°C max. The indication accuracy of the R and S
thermocouples at a temperature of 200°C max. is 3°C 1 digit max. The indication accuracy of W thermocouples is (0.3% of PV or 3C, whichever
is greater) 1 digit max. The indication accuracy of PL II thermocouples is (0.3% of PV or 2°C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max.
*2. Ambient temperature: -10°C to 23°C to 55°C, Voltage range: -15% to 10% of rated voltage
*3. K thermocouple at -100°C max.: 10°C max.
*4. The unit is determined by the setting of the Integral/Derivative Time Unit parameter.
*5. External communications (RS-485) and USB-serial conversion cable communications can be used at the same time.
*6. Refer to your OMRON website for the most recent information on applicable models.
*7. Industrial electromagnetic environment (EN/IEC 61326-1 Table 2)

91
 E5EC-T/E5AC-T

Program Control
Number of programs (patterns) 8
Number of segments (steps) 32
Time setting (Segment set with set point and time.)
Segment setting method
Slope setting (Segment set with segment type, set point, slope, and time.)
0 h 0 min to 99 h 59 min
Segment times
0 min 0 s to 99 min 59 s
Alarm setting Set separately for each program.
Reset operation Select either stopping control or fixed SP operation.
Startup operation Select continuing, resetting, manual operation, or run mode.
Number of sets 8
PID sets
Setting method Set separately for each program (automatic PID group selection also supported).
Alarm SP function Select from ramp SP and target SP.
Segment operation Advance, segment jump, hold, and wait
Program status control
Program operation Program repetitions and program links
Wait method Waiting at segment ends
Wait operation
Wait width setting Same wait width setting for all programs
Number of outputs 2
Number of ON/OFF
Time signals 1 each per output
Operations
Setting method Set separately for each program.
Program status output Program end output (pulse width can be set), run output, stage output
PV start Select from segment 1 set point, slope-priority PV start
Program startup operation 0 h 0 min to 99 h 59 min
Standby
0 day 0 h to 99 day 23h
Operation end operation Select from resetting, continuing control at final set point, and fixed SP control.
Program SP shift Same program SP shift for all programs

92
 E5EC-T/E5AC-T

USB-Serial Conversion Cable When Digital Temperature Controllers are

connected, set points and RUN/STOP
Applicable OS Windows XP/Vista/7/8/10 *1 commands can be sent from the Digital
Applicable software CX-Thermo version 4.61 or higher Temperature Controller that is set as the
Applicable models E5@C-T Series, E5@C Series, and E5CB Series Component master to the Digital Temperature
Communications Controllers that are set as slaves.
USB interface standard Conforms to USB Specification 2.0.
Slope and offsets can be set for the set
DTE speed 38400 bps point.
Computer: USB (type A plug) Number of connected Digital Temperature
Connector
Digital Temperature Controller: Controllers: 32 max. (including master)
specifications
Special serial connector When Digital Temperature Controllers are
Power supply Bus power (Supplied from USB host controller.) *2 connected, the parameters can be copied
Power supply voltage 5 VDC Copying * from the Digital Temperature Controller that is
set as the master to the Digital Temperature
Current consumption 450 mA max.
Controllers that are set as slaves.
4.70.2 VDC MELSEC is a registered trademark of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.
Output voltage (Supplied from USB-Serial Conversion
* Both the programless communications and the component
Cable to the Digital Temperature Controller.)
communications support the copying.
250 mA max.
Output current (Supplied from USB-Serial Conversion
Cable to the Digital Temperature Controller.)
Current Transformer (Order Separately)
Ambient operating Ratings
0 to 55°C (with no condensation or icing)
temperature Dielectric strength 1,000 VAC for 1 min
Ambient operating Vibration resistance 50 Hz, 98 m/s2
10% to 80%
humidity E54-CT1: Approx. 11.5 g,
Storage temperature -20 to 60°C (with no condensation or icing) Weight
E54-CT3: Approx. 50 g
Storage humidity 10% to 80% Accessories Armatures (2)
Altitude 2,000 m max. (E54-CT3 only) Plugs (2)
Weight Approx. 120 g
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the Heater Burnout Alarms and SSR Failure
United States and or other countries. Alarms
*1. CX-Thermo version 4.65 or higher runs on Windows 10.
*2. Use a high-power port for the USB port. CT input (for heater Models with detection for single-phase
Note: A driver must be installed on the computer. Refer to the Instruction current detection) heaters: One input
Manual included with the Cable for the installation procedure. Maximum heater
50 A AC
current
Communications Specifications Input current
5% FS 1 digit max.
indication accuracy
Transmission line
RS-485: Multidrop Heater burnout alarm 0.1 to 49.9 A (in units of 0.1 A)
connection method
setting range *1 Minimum detection ON time: 100 ms *3
Communications RS-485 (two-wire, half duplex)
SSR failure alarm 0.1 to 49.9 A (in units of 0.1 A)
Synchronization setting range *2 Minimum detection OFF time: 100 ms *4
Start-stop synchronization
method
*1. For heater burnout alarms, the heater current will be measured
Protocol CompoWay/F, or Modbus when the control output is ON, and the output will turn ON if the
Baud rate * 9600, 19200, 38400, or 57600 bps heater current is lower than the set value (i.e., heater burnout
Transmission code ASCII detection current value).
*2. For SSR failure alarms, the heater current will be measured when
Data bit length * 7 or 8 bits
the control output is OFF, and the output will turn ON if the heater
Stop bit length * 1 or 2 bits current is higher than the set value (i.e., SSR failure detection
Vertical parity (none, even, odd) current value).
Error detection Block check character (BCC) with *3. The value is 30 ms for a control period of 0.1 s or 0.2 s.
CompoWay/F or CRC-16 Modbus *4. The value is 35 ms for a control period of 0.1 s or 0.2 s.
Flow control None
Interface RS-485 Electrical Life Expectancy Curve for
Retry function None
Communications buffer 217 bytes
Relays (Reference Values)
Life (× 104 operations)

500
Communications 0 to 99 ms
300
response wait time Default: 20 ms
* The baud rate, data bit length, stop bit length, and vertical parity can E5EC-T/E5AC-T
be individually set using the Communications Setting Level. 100 250 VAC, 30 VDC
(resistive load)
50 cosφ = 1
Communications Functions 30
You can use the memory in the PLC to read and
write E5@C-T parameters, start and reset
operation, etc. The E5@C-T automatically 10
performs communications with PLCs. No
communications programming is required. 5
Number of connected Digital Temperature
Programless 3
Controllers: 32 max.
communications * Applicable PLCs
OMRON PLCs 1
CS Series, CJ Series, or 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
CP Series Switching current (A)
Mitsubishi Electric PLCs
MELSEC Q Series, L Series

93
 E5EC-T/E5AC-T
External Connections
E5EC-T/E5AC-T
E5EC T 4 5M E5AC T 4 5M
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

Terminal type Terminal type

Control output 1 Control output 2 Auxiliary outputs

Relay output Relay output Relay output
250 VAC, 5A (resistive load) 250 VAC, 5 A Models with 4 auxiliary Use no-voltage inputs for the event inputs.
Voltage output (for driving SSR) (resistive load) outputs:
250 VAC, 2 A The polarity for non-contact inputs is given in parentheses.
12 VDC, 40 mA Voltage output
(for driving SSR) (resistive load)
21 mA if there are two control outputs
Linear current output 12 VDC, 21 mA (6) Options
0 to 20 mA DC Linear current output 004 005 008 010
4 to 20 mA DC 0 to 20 mA DC Communications Four event inputs Communications, two Four event inputs
4 to 20 mA DC and two event inputs event inputs, and one CT and one CT
Load: 500 Ω max. Load: 500 Ω max.
B(+) B(+)
13 (-) 13 13 (-) 13
RS-485 RS-485
(1)Control Outputs 14 14 14 14
A(-) EV3 A(-) EV3
15 15 15 15
EV4 EV4
RX QX (-) 16 (-) 16 (-) 16 (-) 16
Models with Models with 1 17 17 17 17
1 Relay Output Voltage Output EV1 EV1 EV1 EV1
18 18 18 18
(for Driving SSR) EV2 EV2 EV2 EV2
19 19 19 19
3 OUT1 3 OUT1 CT1 CT1
R +Q 20 20 20 20
4 4 −
(3) Input Power Supply 21 21 21 21
5 5 100 to 240 VAC 24 VAC/DC
6 6 019
1 1
Six event inputs, one CT, and
CX QQ QR 2 2 transfer output
Models with 1 Models with 2 Voltage Models with Voltage Output (for (no polarity) (-) 13
Linear Current Outputs (for Driving SSR) Driving SSR) and Relay Output
14
Output EV3
15
OUT1 EV4
3 OUT1 3 3 OUT1 (-) (-) 16
+ C +Q +Q 1 25 13 28
4 − 4 − 4 − 2 26 14 29 17
EV5 EV1
5 5 OUT2 5 OUT2 3 27 15 30 18
+Q EV6 EV2
− R 4 28 16 + 31 19
6 6 6 CT1
Transfer V + 32 20
5 29 17 output I
RR/PR CC CQ 21
6 30 18 − 33
Models with 2 Models with 2 Models with 2 Output:
Relay Outputs Linear Current Outputs Linear Current Output 7 31 19
and Voltage (for Driving SSR) 8 32 20
OUT1 OUT1 9 33 21
3 3 + C 3 + OUT1 022
R 10 34 22 021
− 4 - C Communications, four event inputs,
4 4 Six event inputs and
11 35 23 and transfer output
5 transfer output
5 OUT2 5 OUT2
+ C + OUT2 12 36 24 (-)
B(+)
R − 6 - Q 13 13
6 6 RS-485
14 14
EV3 A(-)
15 15
(2) Auxiliary Outputs EV4
(-) 28 16 (-) 28 (-) 16
(5) Sensor (Temperature/Analog) Input (-)
Auxiliary outputs 1 to 4 Potentiometer
29 17 29 17
TC Pt I V input EV5 EV1 EV5 EV1
7 A 30 18 30 18
Auxiliary output 4 22 22 + 22 22 O
19 EV6 EV2 EV6 EV2
8 − B − + 31 19 + 31 19
Auxiliary output 3 mA 20
9 23 23 23 23 W Transfer V + Transfer V +
B − V 21 I 32 20 output I 32 20
10 + 24 24 24 24 C output
Auxiliary output 2 + − 33 21 − 33 21
11
Auxiliary output 1
12 The E5@C-T is set for a K-type thermocouple (input type = 5) by
default. An input error (s.err) will not occur if the input type setting
does not agree with the temperature sensor. Check the input type.

Note: 1. The application of the terminals depends on the model.

2. Do not wire the terminals that are shown with a gray background.
3. When complying with EMC standards, the cable that connects the sensor must be 30 m or less. If the cable length exceeds 30 m,
compliance with EMC standards will not be possible.
4. Connect M3 crimped terminals.

Isolation/Insulation Block Diagrams

Models with 4 Auxiliary Outputs

Sensor input, CT input, potentiometer input, and remote SP input

Communications and event inputs

Voltage output (for driving SSR),
Power linear current output, and transfer output
Supply
Relay output

Auxiliary outputs 1, 2

Auxiliary outputs 3, 4

: Reinforced insulation

: Functional isolation

Note: Auxiliary outputs 1 to 2 and 3 to 4 are not insulated.

94
 E5EC-T/E5AC-T
Nomenclature
E5EC-T Front panel

Top View of E5EC-T

Temperature unit No. 1 display

PV or specified monitor/parameter
Operation indicators

No. 2 display
Top-panel
SP or specified monitor/parameter value Setup
Tool port
No. 3 display
Use S Key to change the Program No., segment No.,
digit (default setting). remaining segment time, or MV
(valve opening).
Use the U D Keys to set
Front-panel Setup Tool port the parameter.

Press U Key for at least 1 second when

Process value/Set point parameter are
displayed in Program SP Mode to go to
Display Segment Selection parameter in
Program Setting Level.

Press O Key once to go to Program Setting Level.

Use the M Key to change to another parameter.
Press O Key for at least 3 seconds to go to Initial Setting Level.
Press M and D Keys simultaneously for at
least 1 second to switch between run and
reset status.

E5AC-T

Front Panel

Top View of E5AC-T

Temperature unit
No. 1 display
Operation indicators
PV or specified monitor/parameter

No. 2 display
SP or specified monitor/parameter value

Front-panel Setup Tool port No. 3 display

Program No. and segment No.,
remaining segment time, or MV
(valve opening).
Top-panel
Press the U or D Key Setup
Press the O Key once to go to the to set the parameter. Tool port
Program Setting Level.
Press U Key for at least 1 second when
Process value/Set point parameter are
Press the O Key for at least 3 displayed in Program SP Mode to go to
seconds to go to the Initial Setting Display Segment Selection parameter in
Level. Program Setting Level.

Press the M Key to switch to another parameter.

Press the S Key to change the digit (default setting).

Press M and D Keys simultaneously for at least 1

second to change between run and reset status.

95
 E5EC-T/E5AC-T
Dimensions (Unit: mm)

Controllers
E5EC-T (64) • Setup Tool ports are provided as
4 60
48 1
standard feature. Use these ports to
44
connect a computer to the Digital
Temperature Controller. The E58-
CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable
is required to connect to the port on
the top panel. The E58-CIFQ2 USB-
96 91 Serial Conversion Cable and E58-
110
CIFQ2-E Communications
Conversion Cable are required to
connect to the port on the front panel.
(You cannot leave either port
connected constantly during
operation.)
Waterproof
Packing (Accessory) Mounting Adapter
(Accessory)

Mounted Separately Group Mounted *

(48 × number of units − 2.5)+1.0
0
* Selections for Control Outputs 1 and 2: QQ, QR, RR, CC, PR, or CQ
45+0.6
0 If you also specify 019, 021, 022 for the option selection and use
group mounting, the ambient temperature must be 45°C or less.
Maintain the following spacing when more than one Digital
Controller is installed at an ambient temperature of 55°C.
92+0.8
0

60 min.
45-0.6
0

Group mounting does not

120 min.
allow waterproofing.

92+0.8
0

92-0.8
0

120 min.

• Recommended panel thickness is 1 to 8 mm.

• Group mounting is not possible in the vertical direction. (Maintain the
specified mounting space between Controllers.)
• To mount the Controller so that it is waterproof, insert the waterproof
packing onto the Controller.
• When two or more Controllers are mounted, make sure that the sur-
rounding temperature does not exceed the allowable operating tem-
perature specified in the specifications.

96
 E5EC-T/E5AC-T

E5AC-T (64)
60
96 x 96 4
1 91 x 91

110

Waterproof
Packing (Accessory) Mounting Adapter
(Accessory)

• Setup Tool ports are provided as standard feature. Use these ports to connect a computer to the
Digital Temperature Controller. The E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable is required to
connect to the port on the top panel. The E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable and E58-
CIFQ2-E Communications Conversion Cable are required to connect to the port on the front panel.
(You cannot leave either port connected constantly during operation.)

Mounted Separately Group Mounted

(96 × number of units − 3.5)+1.0
• Recommended panel thickness is 1 to 8 mm.
0
92+0.8
0
• Group mounting is not possible in the vertical direction. (Maintain the
specified mounting space between Controllers.)
• To mount the Controller so that it is waterproof, insert the waterproof
packing onto the Controller.
• When two or more Controllers are mounted, make sure that the sur-
92+0.8
0 rounding temperature does not exceed the allowable operating tem-
perature specified in the specifications.

120 min. Group mounting does not

allow waterproofing.

92+0.8
0

97
 E5EC-T/E5AC-T

Accessories (Order Separately)

USB-Serial Conversion Cable
E58-CIFQ2 (2110)
250 263 1510

LED (RD)

USB connector
(type A plug)
LED (PWR) Serial connector

LED (SD)

Conversion Cable
E58-CIFQ2-E
Conversion Cable Connecting to the E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable
(2110)
(1510) 250 263 1510

E58-CIFQ2 (Order Separately) Conversion Cable

Note: Always use this product together with the E58-CIFQ2.

Terminal Covers Waterproof Packing

E53-COV24 (Three Covers provided.) Y92S-P9 (for DIN 48  96)
2 3.8 The Waterproof Packing is provided with the Temperature
Controller.
Order the Waterproof Packing separately if it becomes lost or
10 damaged.
The degree of protection when the Waterproof Packing is used
is IP66.
Also, keep the Port Cover on the front-panel Setup Tool port
of the E5EC-T/E5AC-T securely closed.
To maintain an IP66 degree of protection, the Waterproof
91 Packing and the Port Cover for the front-panel Setup Tool port
must be periodically replaced because they may deteriorate,
shrink, or harden depending on the operating environment.
Y92S-P10 (for DIN 96  96) The replacement period will vary with the operating
environment.
Check the required period in the actual application.
Use 3 years or sooner as a guideline.

Setup Tool Port Cover for top panel Mounting Adapter

Y92S-P7 Y92F-51 (Two Adapters provided.)

One pair is provided with the

Order this Port Cover
Controller.
separately if the Port Cover on
Order this Adapter
the front-panel Setup Tool port
separately if it becomes lost
is lost or damaged. The
or damaged.
Waterproof Packing must be
periodically replaced because
it may deteriorate, shrink, or
harden depending on the
operating environment.

98
 E5EC-T/E5AC-T

Watertight Cover Watertight Cover

Y92A-49N (48  96) Y92A-96N (96  96)

21.9 21.9
(2) (2)

131.7 131.7

67.6 28.9 115.6 28.9

Current Transformers
E54-CT1 Thru-current (Io) vs. Output Voltage (Eo)
21
2.8
15
(Reference Values)
5.8 dia.
E54-CT1
7.5
Maximum continuous heater current: 50 A (50/60 Hz)
Number of windings: 4002
25 3
Winding resistance: 182 
10.5 100V

Output voltage (Eo) V (r.m.s.)

Frequency: 50 Hz

40 10 ∞ Distortion
1kΩ factor
Two, 3.5 dia.
10%
1
10 3%
1%
100mV
30

10 100Ω
E54-CT3
2.36 dia. 1 RL=10Ω
30
12 dia.
9 100μV

10
1 10 100mA 1 10 100 1,000A
40 × 40
Thru-current (Io) A (r.m.s.)
Thru-current (Io) vs. Output Voltage (Eo)
(Reference Values)
Two, M3 (depth: 4) E54-CT3
Maximum continuous heater current: 120 A (50/60 Hz)
15
(Maximum continuous heater current for an OMRON Digital
Temperature Controller is 50 A.)
30
Number of windings: 4002
Winding resistance: 80.8 
E54-CT3 Accessories 100V
Output voltage (Eo) V (r.m.s.)

Frequency: 50 Hz
• Armature Connection Example Distortion
∞
10 factor
Armature 1kΩ
10%
Approx. 3 dia. Plug 500Ω 3%
1 1%
Lead

100mV
100Ω
18 50Ω
10
RL=10Ω
• Plug
1

Approx. 6 dia. 100μV

(22) 10
1 10 100mA 1 10 100 1,000A
Thru-current (Io) A (r.m.s.)

99
 E5@C/E5@C-T
Operation
Setting Levels Diagram
E5C
This diagram shows all of the setting levels. To move to the advanced function setting level and calibration level, you must enter passwords. Some
parameters are not displayed depending on the protect level setting and the conditions of use.
Control stops when you move from the operation level to the initial setting level.

Press the O + M Keys for Protect Level

at least 1 s
Only when Manual Mode was used Used to set protection
just before power OFF
for operations.
Power ON
Press the O Key
for at least 1 s or
the S Key for at Level changes Press the O + M
least 1 s*1
Operation in progress

automatically. Keys for at least 3 s.*2

Manual Control Press the O Key once.

Adjustment Level
Level Operation Level
Used to change adjustment
Used to set the MV parameters (PID constants,
Used for SP, alarm
manually. O Key for at adjustment sensitivity, etc.).
values, and other basic
least 3 s while settings and monitoring.
a-m is
displayed.*2

Press the S Key.*3 Press the S Key.*3

S Key for at least 1 s*1

Monitor/Setting
Press the O Key
Item Level
Press the O Key for Used to display
for at least 1 s. at least 3 s*2
specified monitor
and setting items.

Control and auxiliary outputs stop.

Press the O Key for less than 1 s.

Initial Setting Level (models with communications only). Communications
Setting Level
Used to set the input type Used to set up
and other basic settings. communications.

Release protection and Press the O Key for at least 1 s.

Stopped

then enter the password

(−169) for the amoV
(Move to Advanced
Setting Level) Advanced Function
parameter.
Setting Level
Used to set application functions.

Enter the password (1201)

while cmov (Move to
Calibration Level
parameter) is displayed.

Calibration Level

*1. Set the PF Setting parameter to a-m (Auto/Manual).

*2. The No. 1 display will flash when the keys are pressed for 1 s or longer.
*3. Set the PF Setting parameter to pfdp (monitor/setting items).

100
 E5@C/E5@C-T

E5C-T
This diagram shows all of the setting levels. To move to the advanced function setting level and calibration level, you must enter passwords. Some
parameters are not displayed depending on the protect level setting and the conditions of use.

Press O and M Keys Protect Level

for at least 1 s.
Used to set protection
Starting in manual mode for operations.
Power ON
Press O and M Keys
Level changes
for at least 3 s.*2
automatically.

Press O or Press S Key.*3

S Key for at least 1 s.*1
Manual Control
Level
Operation in progress

Used to set the MV Operation Level Program Setting

Press O Key
manually. for less than 1 s.
Level
Press O Key for at Parameter and
least 3 s while a-m is Used for SPs and other segment settings for
displayed.*2 basic settings and all programs
monitoring.
Press S Key Press O Key
for at least 1 s.*1 for less than 1 s.

Press O
Key for at
least 1 s. Press O Key
for less than 1 s.
Press O Key
PID Setting for less than 1 s. Adjustment Level
Level
Parameters for all PID Adjustment parameters
sets (e.g., PID (e.g., PID constants for
constants) current PID set)

Press S Key.*3

Press O Key for

at least 3 s.*2 Monitor/Setting
Item Level
Used to display
specified monitor and
setting items.

Control and auxiliary outputs stop.

Press O Key for less

than 1 s (only models
Initial Setting Level with communications). Communications
Setting Level
Used to set the input type
Communications settings
and other basic settings.
Stopped

Release protection and then

Press O Key for at
enter the password (−169) for
least 1 s.
the amoV (Move to Advanced
Function Setting Level)
parameter.
Advanced Function
Setting Level
Advanced settings

Enter the password (1201)

while cmov (Move to
Calibration Level
parameter) is displayed.

Calibration Level

*1. Set the PF Setting parameter to a-m (Auto/Manual).

*2. The No. 1 display will flash when the keys are pressed for 1 s or longer.
*3. Set the PF Setting parameter to pfdp (monitor/setting items).

101
 E5@C/E5@C-T
Operation
Parameters
E5@C
The following pages describe the parameters set in each level. Pressing the M (Mode) Key at the last parameter in each level returns to the top
parameter in that level. Some parameters may not be displayed depending on the model and other settings.
Press the S Key*2
Power ON
Starting in Manual Mode.
Press the O Key for at least 3 s. Press the S Key*2
Starting in Other than the Auto/Manual Switch display
Manual Control Level Automatic
Press the O
Mode. Initial Setting Level
Press the S Key PID
for at least 1 s. C
25 Key or the S Press the Press the O Key for less than 1 s.
Control
0 only Key for at least O Key for
*1
PV/MV 1 s. *1 at least 1 s.
in-t Input Type
5
Adjustment Press the O Key less than 1 s.
M
Level Operation Level
in-h Scaling Upper Limit
Press the O Key less than 1 s. 100
Adjustment Level
Display M
Displayed only 25 Process Value/
al1h Alarm Value
in-l Scaling Lower Limit
l.adj once when
entering
0 Set Point 1 Upper Limit
0 1 0
adjustment level.
ins Process Value Input orl MV Change Rate
Limit M M
0.0 Shift 0.0 M
M M M 25 Process Value/
al1l Alarm Value
Lower Limit dp
Decimal Point
0 Set Point 2 0 1 0
at AT Execute/Cancel inrt Process Value Slope
db Position
off 1.000 Coefficient Proportional M M M
2.0
Dead Band Temperature Unit
M M a-m Auto/Manual Switch
al-2 Alarm d-u
M 0
Value 2 c
Communications
cmwt Writing rss Remote SP Input Shift
oc-h Open/Close Press the M M
off 0.0 Hysteresis
0.8 O Key M
M M for at m-sp Multi-SP
al2h Alarm Value sl-h SP Upper Limit
M least 3 s. 0 0 2
Upper Limit 1300
Remote SP Input
spmd SP Mode rsrt Extraction of
sqrp Square M M
lsp 1.000
Slope Coefficient Root
Low-cut Point
M
0.0
rsp Remote SP Monitor al2l Alarm Value sl-l SP Lower Limit

M M Lower Limit -200

M 0.0 0 2

ct1 Heater Current 1 p Proportional Band

w1on Work Bit 1 M
Value Monitor 8.0 M M
0.0 ON Delay
0 Set Point During cntl PID ON/OFF
M M sp-m SP Ramp al-3 Alarm
Value 3 onof
Integral Time
M 0 0

hb1
Heater Burnout i M
Detection 1 233 w1of Work Bit 1 M M
0.0 0 OFF Delay Heater Current 1 Value Alarm Value
s-hc Standard or
Heating/Cooling
M M ct1 Monitor al3h Upper Limit
stnd
M 0.0 0 3
ct2 Heater Current 2 d Derivative Time M
Value Monitor 40 w2on Work Bit 2 M M
0.0
0 ON Delay Heater Current 2 Value Alarm Value st ST (Self-tuning)
M ct2 Monitor al3l Lower Limit on
M M 0.0 0 3
Heater Burnout
c-p M
hb2 Detection 2
Proportional Band
w2of Work Bit 2 M M
0.0 8.0 (Cooling)
0 OFF Delay Leakage Current 1 Alarm
ptrn Program Pattern
M M lcr1 Monitor al-4 Value 4
off

M 0.0 0 M
lcr1 Leakage Current 1
c-i Integral Time
M M
0.0
Monitor
233 (Cooling) w3on Work Bit 3
ON Delay
cp Control Period (Heating)
0 Leakage Current 2 Alarm Value 20
M M lcr2 Monitor al4h Upper Limit
M 0.0 0 4 M
hs1 HS Alarm 1 c-d Derivative Time
M M c-cp Control Period (Cooling)
50.0 40 (Cooling) w3of Work Bit 3
OFF Delay 20
0 Alarm Value
M M prst Program Start al4l Lower Limit
M rset 0 4 M
Leakage Current 2
lcr2 Monitor c-db Dead Band M M orev Direct/Reverse Operation
0.0 0.0
w4on Work Bit 4
ON Delay Soak Time Remain or-r
0 sktr o MV Monitor
M M 0 0.0
(Heating) M
HS Alarm 2 M
hs2 of-r Manual Reset Value M M alt1 Alarm 1 Type
50.0 50.0 w4of Work Bit 4
RUN/STOP 2
0 OFF Delay r-s c-o MV Monitor
M M run 0.0
(Cooling) M
M alh1 Alarm 1
sp-0 SP 0
hys Hysteresis (Heating) M M
0 w5on Work Bit 5 0.2 Hysteresis
1.0
0 ON Delay al-1 Alarm
Value 1 v-m Valve Opening
Monitor M
M M 0 0.0
Hysteresis (Cooling) M alt2 Alarm 2 Type
sp-1 SP 1 chys M M 2
0 1.0 w5of Work Bit 5
OFF Delay
M
0 M
M Press the O and M Keys for Press the O and M Keys Press the O Key Alarm 2
M for at least 1 s. alh2
sp-2 SP 2
soak Soak Time at least 3 s. less than 1 s.
0.2 Hysteresis
0 1 w6on Work Bit 6
Communications
0 ON Delay
Protect Level M
M M Setting Level
Wait Band M The time taken to move to the protect level Displayed only for models with
sp-3 SP 3
wt-b can be adjusted by changing the "Move to communications. Changes are * Used with programless communications
0 off w6of Work Bit 6
OFF Delay
protect level time" setting. effective after cycling power or
0 after a software reset.
M pmov Move to Protect Level:
up 1 Upload
MV at Stop M 0
Displayed only when a Setting 1
sp-4 SP 4 mv-s password is set. Protocol Setting: Highest
1
0 0.0 w7on Work Bit 7 M psel Switches between maxu Communications
0
ON Delay cwf CompoWay/F and 0 M
Unit No.
M M Operation/Adjustment Protect Modbus.
up13 Upload
M oapt M M *3 Setting 13
sp-5 SP 5 mv-e MV at PV Error
Communications
0
0 0.0 w7of Work Bit 7
0
u-no Unit No. area Area
M
M 0 OFF Delay M 1 0
Download
M Initial Setting/Communications dn 1
SP Ramp Set Value M icpt Protect M M 31
Setting 1
sp-6 SP 6 sprt 1 Communications First Address
0 off w8on Work Bit 8 bps Baud Rate adrh M
0 ON Delay
M 9.6 0
Upper Word
Download
M M wtpt Setting Change Protect dn13
M M M 75
Setting 13
sp-7 SP 7 sprl SP Ramp Fall Value off
First Address
0 same w8of Work Bit 8 M len Communications
Data Length adrl Lower Word
M
OFF Delay 7 0 Copy
M M 0
pfpt PF Key Protect copy
M off
M M off *3
ol-h MV Upper Limit
Communications sbit Communications
rwat Receive Data
100.0 plcm Monitor
M 2
Stop Bits
1000
Wait Time
SP Slope
M
0
chgp Changed Parameters Only *3 sps *3
M off M M 1.000
ol-l MV Lower Limit
M prty Communications Communications
M
0.0 unit Node Number
even Parity 0 SP Offset
M pmsk Parameter Mask Enable spos *3
on M M 0.0

M sdwt
Send Data Wait M
prlp Password to Move to 20 Time
Protect Level *1. When the PF Setting parameter is set to A-M.
0
M *2. When the PF Setting parameter is set to PFDP.
M *3. Used with component communications.

102
 E5@C/E5@C-T

Monitor/Setting Item Level

Monitor/Setting
25
Monitor/Setting
Item Display 1
S Monitor/Setting S Monitor/Setting
Item Display 3
S Item Display 4
S Monitor/Setting
Item Display 5
0
Item Display 2

Note: The monitor/setting items to be displayed is set in the Monitor/Setting Item 1 to 5 parameters (advanced function setting level).

Press the O Key

for at least 1 s.
Advanced Function Setting Level

alt3 Alarm 3 Type

2

M
Automatic Display RT SP Tracking
alh3 Alarm 3 init Parameter Initialization
ret rt sptr
off off Return Time off off
0.2 Hysteresis

M M M M M
alt4 Alarm 4 Type mspu Number of Multi-SP brgt Display Brightness hsu HS Alarm Use p-db PV Dead Band
off Points 3 on 0
2

M M M M M
Alarm 1 Latch Manual MV
Alarm 4 spru SP Ramp Time Unit a1lt hsl HS Alarm Latch manl Limit Enable
alh4 m off off off
0.2 Hysteresis
M M M M
M Direct Setting of
rest Standby Sequence a2lt Alarm 2 Latch
hsh HS Alarm Hysteresis pmvd Position Proportional
o1st Control Output 1 Signal Reset
a off 0.1 off MV
4-20
M M M M
M
PV Rate of Change
sb1n Auxiliary Output 1 a3lt Alarm 3 Latch lba LBA Detection Time pvrp
Calculation Period
o2st Control Output 2 Signal n-o Open in Alarm off 0 20
4-20
M M M M
M
sb2n Auxiliary Output 2 a4lt Alarm 4 Latch
lbal LBA Level hctm Heating/Cooling
trst Transfer Output Signal n-o Open in Alarm off 8.0 off Tuning Method
4-20
M M M M
M
Transfer Output Type
sb3n Auxiliary Output 3
prlt Move to Protect Level
Time lbab LBA Band ompw Minimum Output
tr-t Open in Alarm
n-o 3 3.0 1.0 ON/OFF Band
off
M M M M
M Auxiliary Output 4
Cold Junction Control Output 1 PF Setting
sb4n Open in Alarm cjc Compensation out1 pf
tr-h Transfer Output
Upper Limit n-o on Method o
Assignment
shft
100.0
M M M M
M
hbu HB ON/OFF a1on Alarm 1 ON Delay
out2 Control Output 2
Assignment pfd1 Monitor/Setting Item 1
tr-l Transfer Output
Lower Limit on 0 none 1
0.0
M M M M
M
Auxiliary Output 1
o1th Simple Transfer hbl Heater Burnout Latch a2on Alarm 2 ON Delay
sub1 Assignment pfd2 Monitor/Setting Item 2
Output 1 Upper Limit off 0 alm1 0
100.0

M M M M
M Auxiliary Output 2
hbh Heater Burnout a3on Alarm 3 ON Delay sub2 Assignment pfd3 Monitor/Setting Item 3
o1tl Simple Transfer
Ouptut 1 Lower Limit Hysteresis
0.1 0 alm2 0
0.0

M M M M
M
st-b ST Stable Range a4on Alarm 4 ON Delay
sub3 Auxiliary
Assignment
Output 3
pfd4 Monitor/Setting Item 4
ev-1 Event Input
Assignment 1 15.0
0 alm3 0
msp0

M M M M M
alfa α a1of Alarm 1 OFF Delay
sub4 Auxiliary Output 4
pfd5 Monitor/Setting Item 5
ev-2 Event Input
Assignment 2 0.65 0
Assignment
alm4 (E5EC/E5AC only) 0
stop
M M M M
M
ev-3 Event Input tidu Integral/Derivative a2of Alarm 2 OFF Delay alma Integrated Alarm spd1 PV/SP No. 1 Display
Selection
Assignment 3 1 Time Unit 0 49 Assignment 4
none

M M M M M
PV/SP No. 2 Display
Event Input at-g AT Calculated Gain a3of Alarm 3 OFF Delay
t-u Soak Time Unit spd2 Selection
ev-4 Assignment 4 0.8 0 m 0
none
M M M M
M Alarm 4 OFF Delay Alarm SP Selection MV Display Selection
ev-5 Event Input at-h AT Hysteresis a4of alsp odsl
0.8 0 sp-m o
Assignment 5
none
M M M M
M PV Decimal Point
Remote SP Input
ev-6
Event Input lcma Limit Cycle MV mvse MV at Stop and Error
Addition rs-t pvdp Display
Assignment 6 20.0 Amplitude off 4-20 on
none
M M M M
M PV Status Display
clfl Close/Floating inf Input Digital Filter amad Auto/Manual Select
Addition rspu Remote SP Enable pvst Function
flot 0.0 off off off

M M M M M
calb Motor Calibration mav Moving Average Count mant Manual Output Method rsph Remote SP
Upper Limit
svst SV Status Display
Function
off off hold 1300 off

M M M M M
MV Display Display Refresh
mot Travel Time o-dp mani Manual MV Initial Value rspl Remote SP
d.ref Period
30 M
off M0.0
Lower Limit
-200 0.25

M M M M M
sqr Extraction of Square lcmt LCT Cooling Output
Minimum ON Time
Root Enable 0.2
off

M Move to Advanced Function M

amov Setting Level: cmov Move
Level
to Calibration
Displayed when initial 0
0
setting/communications
M protect is set to 0. M
Move by setting password (−169).

103
 E5@C/E5@C-T

E5@C-T
Some parameters may not be displayed depending on the model and other settings.

Starting in manual mode

Monitor/Setting Item Level
PF Monitor/
S
Manual Control Level Power ON 25 Setting Item
0
display 1
PF Monitor/Setting
Item display 2 to 5

* The monitor/setting items to display are set in the Monitor/Setting Item 1 to 5 parameters
25 PV/Manual MV (Advanced Function Setting Level).
50.0
Press S Key.*2 Press S Key.*2
Press O Key for Press O or S
at least 3 s while Key for at least
a-m is displayed. 1 s.*1

Press S
Key for at Program Setting Level
least 1 s.*1
U
Display Program
Selection
Operation Level 6 7
d.prg 45
23
01
Process Value/Set
D 25 Point 1 or Process
Value/Set Point 2 in
25 Process prgt Elapsed
Program Time
Press O M 0 Operation Level
Value/Set Point 1
0 0.00 Key for
M M
Monitor
less than
s-no Number of
Segments Used
Press the U Key
8 Display Segment Selection for at least 1 s in
Program Execution 1 s. Program SP Mode.
25 Process rptm Repetitions Monitor
M END or 0 to Number of segments used − 1
Value/Set Point 2
0 0
U
M M

ct1 67
a-m Auto/Manual Switch Heater Current 1 to
2 Value Monitor d.seg U
d.seg 3 45
0.0
end D 0 12 D
M M
pgsg Program No. Monitor/
Segment No. Monitor lcr1 Leakage Current 1
to 2 Value Monitor
For end M For 0 to 7 M
0.00 0.0 rpt Program
M
M
pid PID Set No.
0
Repetitions styp Segment n Format

1 M
ramp
prg Program Number
r-r Run/Reset M M
0 rst
(of the program)
link Program
M M al-1 Alarm Value
1 to 4 end
Link
Destination
sp Segment n SP

0 M 0
hold Hold
o MV Monitor M
(Heating) M
off 0.0 al1h Alarm
ts1s Time Signal 1 to 2
M M 0
Upper Limit
0
Set Segment pr Segment n Slope
1 to 4
0
seg Segment Number
c-o MV Monitor M M
M
0 0.0
(Cooling) al1l Alarm
Lower Limit
on1 Time Signal 1 to 2
ON Time
M 0 1 to 4 0.00 time Segment n Time
M
M 0.00
stbm Remaining
v-m Valve Opening M
0.00
Standby Time
Monitor of1 Time Signal 1 to 2
OFF Time
M
Monitor 0.0 0.00
M M
M

Press O Key for less than 1 s. Adjustment Level Press O Key for less than 1 s.
PID Setting Level
Adjustment Level
l.adj Display
d.pid U Display PID
1234 Displayed only once
p Proportional Band
1 2 Selection
M when entering lcr1 Leakage Current 1 to 2
3 4 Adjustment Level. 0.0 Value Monitor 8.0
5 6 Press O M M
7 8
D Key for less AT Execute/Cancel hs1
than 1 s.
at HS Alarm 1 to 2
i Integral Time
M off 50.0 233
1.p PID 1
Proportional 1.cdb PID 1 Dead M M M
8.0 Band
Band 0.0 cmwt Communications
Writing ins PV Input Shift d Derivative Time
M M off 0.0 40
1.i PID 1 Integral
Time 1.ofr PID 1 Manual M M M
233 Reset Value
s0.0 spmd SP Mode
inrt PV Input Slope c-p Proportional Band (Cooling)
M Coefficient
M psp 1.000 8.0
1.d PID 1
Derivative Time 1.olh PID 1 MV Upper M M M
40 Limit
100.0 fsp Fixed SP
wt-b Wait Band c-i Integral Time (Cooling)
M M 0 off 233
1.c-p PID 1
Proportional
1.oll PID 1 MV Lower M M M
Limit
8.0 0.0
Band (Cooling)
ct1 Heater Current 1 to 2 stb Standby Time c-d Derivative Time (Cooling)
M M Value Monitor
40
0.0 0.00
1.c-i PID 1 Integral 1.aut PID 1 Automatic M M M
Time (Cooling) Selection Range
233 1320 Upper Limit hb1 Heater Burnout
psps Program SP Shift Value c-db Dead Band
Detection 1 to 2
M M 0.0
0 0.0
1.c-d PID 1
Derivative Time
1.lba PID 1 LBA
Detection
M M M
40 (Cooling) 0 Time
M M

104
 E5@C/E5@C-T

Press O Key
Protect Level for at least 1 s.

Press O + M Key
for at least 3 s. M Operation/Adjustment PF Key Protect
pmov oapt Protect pfpt
0 0 off
Move to Protect Level M M
Initial Setting/ Parameter Mask Enable
Press O + M Key for at least 3 s. (The key pressing icpt Communications Protect pmsk
time can be changed in the Move to Protect Level 1 on
Time parameter (Advanced Function Setting Level).) M M
Setting Change Protect Password to Move
wtpt prlp to Protect Level
Press O + M Key for at least 1 s. off 0
M M

Initial Setting Level

Press O Key
for at least 3 s. Control Period
in-t Input Type sl-l SP Lower Limit
eset Operation End
Operation
c-cp (Cooling) tr-t Transfer Output
Type
calb Motor Calibration

5 -200 rst 20 off off

M M M M M M
Press O Key Direct/Reverse
Scaling Upper Limit
for at least 1 s. in-h t-u Program Time Unit
pvst PV Start orev Operation tr-h Transfer Output
Upper Limit
mot Travel Time

100 h-m sp or-r 100.0 30

M M M M M M
Scaling Lower Limit
Press O Key in-l t-pr Step Time/Rate of
Rise Programming
tspu All PID AT Upper
Limit SP
alt1 Alarm 1 to 4
Type
tr-l Transfer Output
Lower Limit
vl-c Valve Completely
Closed Position
for at least 3 s. 0 time 0 2 0.0 0
M M M M M M
Decimal Point alh1 Alarm 1 to 4
ev-1 vl-o
dp pru Time Unit of Ramp
Rate
cntl PID ON/OFF
0.2
Hysteresis Event Input
Assignment 1
Valve Completely
Open Position
0 m pid rr-1 9999
M M M M M M

d-u Temperature rtsm Reset Operation s-hc Standard or

Heating/Cooling
o1st Control output
1 to 2 Signal ev-2 Event Input pms Potentiometer
Unit Assignment 2 Specification Setting
c stop stnd 4-20 adv 0
M M M M M
M
Control Period
sl-h SP Upper Limit p-on Startup Operation cp (Heating) trst Transfer Output
Signal
ev-3 Event Input
Assignment 3
sqr Extraction of
Square Root
1300 cont 20 4-20 none to 6 off Enable
M M M M M M

clfl Close/Floating amov Moves to Advanced

Function Setting
flot 0 Level

M M Enter password (−169)

to move.

Press O Key for less than 1 s.

Communications Setting Level

Communications
psel Protocol Setting
sdwt Send Data
Wait Time
unit Node Number
cwf 20 0
M M M
of-r Manual Reset Value orl MV Change Rate
Limit u-no Communications
maxu
Highest
Communications up 1 Upload
Unit No.
50.0 0.0 1 0 Unit No. 0
Setting
1 to 23
M M M M M
hys Hysteresis (Heating)
db Position Proportional
bps Communications
area Area
1.0 2.0
Dead Band Baud Rate dn 1 Download
9.6 0 0 Setting
M M M M 1 to 43
M
chys Hysteresis (Cooling)
oc-h Open/Close
Hysteresis len Communications adrh
First Address
Upper Word Copy
1.0 0.8 7
Data Length
0 copy
M M off
M
M M
M
mv-r MV at Reset
sqrp Extraction of Square
Root Low-cut Point sbit Communications adrl
First Address
Lower Word
0.0 0.0 2
Stop Bits
0
M M M
M
mv-e MV at PV Error
w1on Work Bit 1 to 8 ON
prty Communications
rwat
Receive Data
Wait Time
0.0 Delay Parity
0 even 1000
M M M M
Work Bit 1 to 8 OFF
ol-h MV Upper Limit w1of Delay
100.0 0
Models with communications only: Changes to settings are applied
M
M when the power is cycled or a software reset is performed.
ol-l MV Lower Limit

0.0 plcm Communications

Monitor
M
0 *1 When PF Setting = A-M.
M
*2 When PF Setting = PFDP.

105
 E5@C/E5@C-T

Advanced Function Setting Level

Direct Setting of Position

init Parameter Initialization mant Manual Output Method pmvd Proportional MV
off hold off
M M M
PV Rate of Change
pend Program End ON Time mani Manual MV Initial Value pvrp Calculation Period
0.0 0.0 20
M M M
Heating/Cooling Tuning
s-u Standby Time Unit rt RT hctm Method
h-m off 0
M M M

rest Standby Sequence Reset hsu HS Alarm Use ompw Minimum Output ON/OFF
1.0 Band
a on
M M M

sb1n Auxiliary Output 1 to 4 hsl HS Alarm Latch lcmt LCT Cooling Output Min.
0.2 ON Time
n-o Open in Alarm off
M M M

hbu HB ON/OFF hsh HS Alarm Hysteresis pf PF Setting

on 0.1 shft
M M M

hbl Heater Burnout Latch lba LBA Detection Time pfd1 PF Monitor/Setting Item 1

off 0 1
M M M

hbh Heater Burnout Hysteresis lbal LBA Level pfd2 PF Monitor/

Setting Item 2 to 5
0.1 8.0 0
M M M
PV/SP No. 1
alfa α lbab LBA Band spd1 Display Selection
0.65 3.0 6
M M M
PV/SP No. 2
tidu Integral/Derivative Time Unit out1 Control Output 1 spd2 Display Selection
1 o Assignment 7
M M M

at-g AT Calculated Gain out2 Control Output 2

Assignment
pvst PV Status Display Function
0.8 none off
M M M

at-h AT Hysteresis
sub1 Auxiliary Output 1 svst SV Status Display Function
0.8 alm1 Assignment
off
M M M

lcma Limit Cycle MV Amplitude

sub2 Auxiliary Output 2 d.ref Display Refresh Period
20.0 alm2 Assignment 0.25
M M M

inf Input Digital Filter sub3 Auxiliary Output 3 burn Burnout Method
Assignment
0.0 alm3 up
M M M
Auxiliary Output 4
mav Moving Average Count sub4 Assignment pmst Parameter Mask Setting
off alm4 off
M M M

ret Automatic Display

Return Time
alma Integrated Alarm cmov Move to Calibration Level
off 49 Assignment 0
M M M

brgt Display Brightness alsp Alarm SP Selection

3 sp-m
M M

a1lt Alarm 1 to 4 Latch sptr SP Tracking

off off
M M

prlt Move to Protect Level Time pidi PID Set Automatic

3 pv Selection Data

M
M

cjc Cold Junction pidh PID Set Automatic

on Compensation Method 0.50 Selection Hysteresis

M
M

a1on Alarm 1 to 4 ON Delay

p-db PV Dead Band

0 0
M
M
Manual MV Limit Enable
a1of Alarm 1 to 4 OFF Delay
manl
off
0
M
M

106
 E5@C/E5@C-T
Error Displays (Troubleshooting)
When an error occurs, the No. 1 display or No. 2 display shows the error code.
Take necessary measure according to the error code, referring the following table.
Display Name Meaning Action Operation
The input value exceeded the control Check the wiring for input to be sure After the error occurs and it is
range.* it is wired correctly, not broken, and displayed, the alarm output will operate
The input type is not set correctly. not shorted. Also check the input as if the upper limit was exceeded.
The sensor is disconnected or short- type. It will also operate as if transfer
circuited. If there are no problems in the wiring output exceeded the upper limit.
The sensor is not wired correctly. or input type settings, cycle the If an input error is assigned to a
The sensor is not wired. power supply. control output or auxiliary output, the
If the display remains the same, output will turn ON when the input
* Control Range replace the Digital Temperature error occurs.
s.err Input error Temperature resistance Controller. The error message will appear in the
thermometer or thermocouple input: If the display is restored to normal, display for the PV.
SP Lower Limit - 20°C to SP Upper then the probable cause is external
Limit + 20°C noise affecting the control system. Note: 1. The heating and cooling
(SP Lower Limit - 40°F to SP Upper Check for external noise. control outputs will turn OFF.
Limit + 40°F) 2. When the manual MV, MV
ESIB input: Note: For a temperature resistance at stop, MV at reset, or MV
Same as specified input range. thermometer, the input is at error is set, the control
Analog input: considered disconnected if output is determined by the
Scaling range -5% to 105% the A, B, or B’ line is broken. set value.
This is not an error. It Control continues and operation is
is displayed when the normal.
[[[[ Below -1,999 control range is wider The value will appear in the display
than the display range for the PV.
Display and the PV exceeds Refer to the E5@C Digital Temperature
range the display range. - Controllers User’s Manual (Cat. No.
exceeded The PV is displayed H174) or the E5@C-T Digital
for the range that is Temperature Controllers
]]]] Above 9,999 given on the left (the Programmable Type User’s Manual
number without the (Cat. No. H185) for information on the
decimal point). controllable range.
After checking the input error, turn
the power OFF then back ON again.
The control outputs, auxiliary
If the display remains the same, the
A/D outputs, and transfer outputs turn
There is an error in the internal controller must be repaired.
e333 converter
circuits. If the display is restored to normal,
OFF. (A current output will be approx.
error 0 mA and a linear voltage output will
then a probable cause can be
be approx. 0V.)
external noise affecting the control
system. Check for external noise.
First, cycle the power supply.
If the display remains the same, the The control outputs, auxiliary
controller must be repaired. outputs, and transfer outputs turn
Memory There is an error in the internal
e111 error memory operation.
If the display is restored to normal, OFF. (A current output will be approx.
then a probable cause can be 0 mA and a linear voltage output will
external noise affecting the control be approx. 0V.)
system. Check for external noise.
Control continues and operation is
normal.
The error message will appear for the
This error is displayed when the peak following displays.
ffff Overcurrent
current exceeds 55.0 A.
-
Heater Current Value 1 Monitor
Heater Current Value 2 Monitor
Leakage Current Value 1 Monitor
Leakage Current Value 2 Monitor
The No. 1 display for the following
parameter flashes in Operation Level
or Adjustment Level.
ct1 If there is a HB or HS alarm, the No. Heater Current Value 1 Monitor
ct2 HB or HS
1 display will flash in the relevant - Heater Current Value 2 Monitor
lcr1 alarm
setting level. Leakage Current Value 1 Monitor
lcr2 Leakage Current Value 2 Monitor
However, control continues and
operation is normal.
"----" will be displayed for the Valve
Opening Monitor parameter if any of
the following error occurs.
Potentiometer • Motor calibration has not been Close control: The control output is
Input Error performed. OFF or the value that is set for the
---- (Position- • The wiring of the potentiometer is Check for the above errors. MV at PV Error parameter is output.
proportional incorrect or broken. Floating control: Operation will be
Models Only) • The potentiometer input value is normal.
incorrect (e.g., the input is out of
range or the potentiometer has
failed).

107
 E5@C/E5@C-T
Safety Precautions
Be sure to read the precautions for all E5@C/E5@C-T models in the website at: http://www.ia.omron.com/.
Warning Indications
Minor electric shock or fire may occasionally occur.
Indicates a potentially hazardous Do not use any cables that are damaged.
situation which, if not avoided, may
CAUTION result in minor or moderate injury or in
property damage.
Never disassemble, modify, or repair the product or
Precautions for Supplementary comments on what to touch any of the internal parts. Minor electric shock,
do or avoid doing, to use the product
Safe Use fire, or malfunction may occasionally occur.
safely.
Supplementary comments on what to CAUTION - Risk of Fire and Electric Shock
Precautions for do or avoid doing, to prevent failure to 1. This product is UL listed *1 as Open Type Process
Correct Use operate, malfunction or undesirable Control Equipment. It must be mounted in an
effect on product performance. enclosure that does not allow fire to escape externally.
2. More than one disconnect switch may be required to
Meaning of Product Safety Symbols de-energize the equipment before servicing the product.
3. Signal inputs are SELV, limited energy. *2
Used to warn of the risk of electric shock under 4. Caution: To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, do not
specific conditions. interconnect the outputs of different Class 2 circuits. *3

If the output relays are used past their life expectancy,

Used for general prohibitions for which there is no contact fusing or burning may occasionally occur.
specific symbol. Always consider the application conditions and use
the output relays within their rated load and electrical
Used to indicate prohibition when there is a risk of life expectancy. The life expectancy of output relays varies
minor injury from electrical shock or other source considerably with the output load and switching conditions.
if the product is disassembled.
Used for general CAUTION, WARNING, or Even if you replace only the Main Unit of the E5DC,
DANGER precautions for which there is no check the condition of the Terminal Unit.
specified symbol. (This symbol is also used as the If corroded terminals are used, contact failure in the
alerting symbol, but shall not be used in this terminals may cause the temperature inside the
meaning on the product.)
Digital Temperature Controller to increase, possibly resulting in
fire.
Used for general mandatory action precautions If the terminals are corroded, replace the Terminal Unit as well.
for which there is no specified symbol.
Tighten the terminal screws to the rated torque of
CAUTION between 0.43 and 0.58 N•m. *4
Loose screws may occasionally result in fire.
Do not touch the terminals while power is being
supplied. Set the parameters of the product so that they are
Doing so may occasionally result in minor injury due suitable for the system being controlled. If they are
to electric shock. not suitable, unexpected operation may occasionally
result in property damage or accidents.
Electric shock may occur. Do not touch any cables or
connectors with wet hands. A malfunction in the product may occasionally make
control operations impossible or prevent alarm
outputs, resulting in property damage.
Minor electric shock, fire, or malfunction may
To maintain safety in the event of malfunction of the
occasionally occur. Do not allow any metal,
product, take appropriate safety measures, such as installing a
conductors, chips from mounting work, or water to
monitoring device on a separate line.
enter the interior of the Digital Controller, the Setting
Tool port, or between the pins on the Setting Tool cable
*1. E5CC, E5EC, E5AC, and E5DC Digital Temperature Controllers
connector.
that were shipped through November 2013 are UL recognized.
If you do not use the Setting Tool port on the front panel, close *2. An SELV (separated extra-low voltage) system is one with a
the cover securely so that the above foreign matter does not power supply that has double or reinforced insulation between the
enter. primary and the secondary circuits and has an output voltage of
30 V r.m.s. max. and 42.4 V peak max. or 60 VDC max.
Do not use the Digital Temperature Controller where *3. A class 2 circuit is one tested and certified by UL as having the
current and voltage of the secondary output restricted to specific
subject to flammable or explosive gas. Otherwise,
levels.
minor injury from explosion may occasionally occur. *4. The specified torque is 0.5 N·m for the E5CC-U.

Not doing so may occasionally result in fire. Do not

allow dirt or other foreign objects to enter the Setup
Tool port or ports, or between the pins on the
connectors on the Setup Tool cable.

108
 E5@C/E5@C-T

Precautions for Safe Use

Be sure to observe the following precautions to prevent malfunction 6. Do not wire the terminals that are not used.
or adverse affects on the performance or functionality of the product. 7. Use a commercial power supply for the power supply voltage input
Not doing so may occasionally result in faulty operation. Do not to a Digital Temperature Controller with AC input specifications.
handle the Digital Temperature Controller in ways that exceed the Do not use the output from an inverter as the power supply.
Depending on the output characteristics of the inverter,
ratings.
temperature increases in the Digital Temperature Controller may
1. This product is specifically designed for indoor use only.
cause smoke or fire damage even if the inverter has a specified
Do not use this product in the following places:
output frequency of 50/60 Hz.
• Places directly subject to heat radiated from heating equipment.
8. To avoid inductive noise, keep the wiring for the product’s terminal
• Places subject to splashing liquid or oil atmosphere. block away from power cables carry high voltages or large
• Places subject to direct sunlight. currents. Also, do not wire power lines together with or parallel to
• Places subject to dust or corrosive gas (in particular, sulfide gas product wiring. Using shielded cables and using separate conduits
and ammonia gas). or ducts is recommended.
• Places subject to intense temperature change. Attach a surge suppressor or noise filter to peripheral devices that
• Places subject to icing and condensation. generate noise (in particular, motors, transformers, solenoids,
• Places subject to vibration and large shocks. magnetic coils, or other equipment that have an inductance
component).
2. Use and store the product within the rated ambient temperature
When a noise filter is used at the power supply, first check the
and humidity.
voltage or current, and attach the noise filter as close as possible
Gang-mounting two or more Digital Temperature Controllers, or
to the product.
mounting Digital Temperature Controllers above each other may
Allow as much space as possible between the product and
cause heat to build up inside the Digital Temperature Controllers,
devices that generate powerful high frequencies (high-frequency
which will shorten their service life. In such a case, use forced
welders, high-frequency sewing machines, etc.) or surge.
cooling by fans or other means of air ventilation to cool down the
9. Use this product within the rated load and power supply.
Digital Temperature Controllers.
10.Make sure that the rated voltage is attained within two seconds of
3. To allow heat to escape, do not block the area around the Digital
turning ON the power using a switch or relay contact. If the voltage
Temperature Controller.
is applied gradually, the power may not be reset or output
Do not block the ventilation holes on the Digital Temperature
malfunctions may occur.
Controller.
11.Make sure that the Digital Temperature Controller has 30 minutes
4. Be sure to wire properly with correct signal name and polarity of
or more to warm up after turning ON the power before starting
terminals.
actual control operations to ensure the correct temperature
5. Use copper stranded or solid wires to connect bare wires.
display.
Recommended Wire 12.When executing self-tuning with E5@C, turn ON power to the load
(e.g., heater) at the same time as or before supplying power to the
Model Wire Size Wire Stripping length
product. If power is turned ON to the product before turning ON
E5CC/E5EC/ power to the load, self-tuning will not be performed properly and
E5AC/E5DC/ optimum control will not be achieved.
E5@C-T/E5GC 6 to 8 mm 13.A switch or circuit breaker must be provided close to the product.
(Controllers with
AWG24 to AWG18 The switch or circuit breaker must be within easy reach of the
Screw Terminal)
(0.21 to 0.82mm2 ) operator, and must be marked as a disconnecting means for this
E5GC unit.
(Controllers with 14.Use a soft and dry cloth to clean the product carefully. Do not use
8 to 12 mm
Screwless Clamp organic solvent, such as paint thinner, benzine or alcohol to clean
Terminal)
the product.
E5CC-U AWG24 to 14
5 to 6 mm 15.Design the system (e.g., control panel) considering the 2 seconds
(Plug-in model) (0.21 to 2.08mm2 ) of delay that the product's output to be set after power ON.
E5@C-B 16.The output may turn OFF when you move to the initial setting level.
0.25 to 1.5mm2 Take this into consideration when performing control operations.
(Controllers with Ferrules used: 10 mm *1
Equivalent to
Push-In Plus
AWG24 to 16
Ferrules not used: 8 mm 17.The number of non-volatile memory write operations is limited.
Terminal) Therefore, use RAM write mode when frequently overwriting data
*1. Please use Ferrules with UL certification (R/C). during communications or other operations.
18.Always touch a grounded piece of metal before touching the
Use the specified size of crimped terminals to wire the E5CC, Digital Temperature Controller to discharge static electricity from
E5EC, E5AC, E5DC, and E5GC (models with screw terminal) and your body.
the E5@C-T and E5CC-U (plug-in models). 19.Use suitable tools when taking the Digital Temperature Controller
apart for disposal. Sharp parts inside the Digital Temperature
Recommended Crimped Terminal Size Controller may cause injury.
20.For compliance with Lloyd’s standards, the E5CC, E5CC-B,
Model Wire Size E5EC-B, E5CC-U, E5EC, E5AC, and E5DC must be installed
E5CC/E5EC/E5AC/E5DC/E5@C-T/ under the conditions that are specified in Shipping Standards.
E5GC (Controllers with Screw M3, Width: 5.8 mm max. 21.For the Digital Temperature Controller with two Setup Tool ports
Terminal) (E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC/E5DC/E5GC), do not connect cables to
both ports at the same time. The Digital Temperature Controller
E5CC-U (Plug-in model) M3.5, Width: 7.2 mm max.
may be damaged or may malfunction.
For the E5@C-B (Push-In Plus model), connect only one wire to 22.Do not place heavy object on the Conversion Cable, bend the
each terminal. cable past its natural bending radius, or pull on the cable with
For other models, up to two wires of same size and type, or two undue force. The Digital Temperature Controller may be
crimp terminals, can be inserted into a single terminal. damaged.
When connecting two wires to one terminal on an E5GC Digital
Temperature Controller with a screwless clamp terminal, use two
crimped ferrules with a diameter of 0.8 to 1.4 mm and an exposed
conductor length of 8 to 12 mm. *2
*2. The E5GC Digital Temperature Controller with screwless
clamp terminal underwent UL testing with one braided wire
connected.

109
 E5@C/E5@C-T

23.Do not disconnect the Communications Conversion Cable or the

USB-Serial Conversion Cable while communications are in Shipping Standards
progress. Damage or malfunction may occur.
The E5CC, E5CC-B, E5CC-U, E5EC, E5EC-B, E5AC, and E5DC
24.Do not touch the external power supply terminals or other metal
parts on the Digital Temperature Controller. comply with Lloyd's standards. When applying the standards, the
25.Do not exceed the communications distance that is given in the following installation requirements must be met in the application.
specifications and use the specified communications cable. Refer Also insert the Waterproof Packing on the backside of the front panel.
to the E5@C Digital Temperature Controllers User’s Manual (Cat.
No. H174) for information on the communications distances and Application Conditions
cables for the E5@C. Installation Location
For details on the E5@C-T, refer to the E5@C-T Digital
Temperature Controllers Programmable Type User’s Manual (Cat. The E5CC, E5CC-B, E5CC-U, E5EC, E5EC-B, E5AC, and E5DC
No. H185). comply with installation category ENV1 and ENV2 of Lloyd's
26.Do not bend the communications cables past their natural bending standards. Therefore, they must be installed in a location equipped
radius. Do not pull on the communications cables. with air conditioning. They cannot be used on the bridge or decks, or
27.Do not turn the power supply to the Digital Temperature Controller in a location subject to strong vibration.
ON or OFF while the USB-Serial Conversion Cable is connected.
The Digital Temperature Controller may malfunction. Precautions for Correct Use
28.Make sure that the indicators on the USB-Serial Conversion Cable
are operating properly. Depending on the application conditions, Service Life
deterioration in the connectors and cable may be accelerated, and
normal communications may become impossible. Perform 1. Use the product within the following temperature and humidity ranges:
periodic inspection and replacement. Temperature: -10 to 55°C (with no icing or condensation)
29.Connectors may be damaged if they are inserted with excessive Humidity: 25% to 85%
force. When connecting a connector, always make sure that it is If the product is installed inside a control board, the ambient
oriented correctly. Do not force the connector if it does not connect temperature must be kept to under 55°C, including the temperature
smoothly. around the product.
30.Noise may enter on the USB-Serial Conversion Cable, possibly 2. The service life of electronic devices like Digital Temperature
causing equipment malfunctions. Do not leave the USB-Serial Controllers is determined not only by the number of times the relay is
Conversion Cable connected constantly to the equipment. switched but also by the service life of internal electronic components.
31.For the E5DC, when you attach the Main Unit to the Terminal Unit, Component service life is affected by the ambient temperature: the
make sure that the hooks on the Main Unit are securely inserted higher the temperature, the shorter the service life and, the lower
into the Terminal Unit. the temperature, the longer the service life. Therefore, the service
32.For the E5CC-U, when you attach the Main Unit to the socket, life can be extended by lowering the temperature of the Digital
make sure that the hooks on the socket are securely inserted into Temperature Controller.
the Main Unit. 3. When two or more Digital Temperature Controllers are mounted
33.Install the DIN Track vertically to the ground. horizontally close to each other or vertically next to one another,
34.For the E5DC, always turn OFF the power supply before the internal temperature will increase due to heat radiated by the
connecting the Main Unit to or disconnecting the Main Unit from Digital Temperature Controllers and the service life will decrease.
the Terminal Unit, and never touch nor apply shock to the In such a case, use forced cooling by fans or other means of air
terminals or electronic components. When connecting or ventilation to cool down the Digital Temperature Controllers. When
disconnecting the Main Unit, do not allow the electronic providing forced cooling, however, be careful not to cool down the
components to touch the case. terminals sections alone to avoid measurement errors.
35.Observe the following precautions when you remove the terminal
block or pulling out the interior of the product of the E5GC.
• Always follow the instructions provided in the E5@C Digital
Temperature Controllers User’s Manual (Cat. No. H174).
• Turn OFF the power supply before you start and never touch nor
apply shock to the terminals or electric components. When you
insert the interior body of the Digital Temperature Controller, do
not allow the electronic components to touch the case.
• Check for any corrosion on the terminals.
• When you insert the interior body into the rear case, confirm that
the hooks on the top and bottom are securely engaged with the
case.
36.Observe the following precautions when you wire the E5@C-B.
• Always follow the wiring instructions provided in Wiring
Precautions for E5@C-B (Controllers with Push-In Plus
Terminal) on page 116.
• Do not wire anything to the release holes.
• Do not tilt or twist a flat-blade screwdriver while it is inserted into
a release hole on the terminal block. The terminal block may be
damaged.
• Insert a flat-blade screwdriver into the release holes at an angle.
The terminal block may be damaged if you insert the
screwdriver straight in.
• Do not allow the flat-blade screwdriver to fall out while it is
inserted into a release hole.
• Do not bend a wire past its natural bending radius or pull on it
with excessive force. Doing so may cause the wire to break.
• Do not use crossover wiring except for the input power supply
and communications.

110
 E5@C/E5@C-T

Measurement Accuracy Mounting

1. When extending or connecting the thermocouple lead wire, be sure to Mounting to a Panel
use compensating wires that match the thermocouple types. E5GC
2. When extending or connecting the lead wire of the platinum resistance Adapter
thermometer, be sure to use wires that have low resistance and keep
the resistance of the three lead wires the same.
3. Mount the product so that it is horizontally level.
4. If the measurement accuracy is low, check to see if input shift has
been set correctly. Waterproof
Packing
Waterproofing (Not applicable to the E5CC-U/
E5DC.) Panel

The degree of protection is as shown below. Sections without any

specification on their degree of protection or those with IP@0 are not 1. For waterproof mounting, waterproof packing must be installed on
waterproof. the Digital Temperature Controller. Waterproofing is not possible
Front panel: IP66, Rear case: IP20, Terminal section: IP00 when group mounting several Digital Temperature Controllers.
When waterproofing is required, insert the Waterproof Packing on the 2. Insert the E5GC into the mounting hole in the panel.
3. Use two Mounting Adapters, either on the top and bottom or on the
backside of the front panel. Keep the Port Cover on the front-panel
right and left.
Setup Tool port of the E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC/E5EC-T/E5AC-T 4. Push the Adapters from the terminals up to the panel, and
securely closed. The degree of protection when the Waterproof temporarily fasten the E5GC.
Packing is used is IP66. To maintain an IP66 degree of protection, the 5. Tighten the two fastening screws on the Adapter. Alternately
Waterproof Packing and the Port Cover for the front-panel Setup Tool tighten the two screws little by little to maintain a balance. Tighten
port must be periodically replaced because they may deteriorate, the screws to a torque of 0.29 to 0.39 N·m.
shrink, or harden depending on the operating environment. The E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U/E5CC-T
replacement period will vary with the operating environment. Check • E5CC/E5CC-T
the required period in the actual application. Use 3 years or sooner as There are two models of Terminal Covers that you can use with the
a guideline. E5CC/E5CC-T.
Terminal Cover
Operating Precautions (E53-COV17)
Terminal Cover
(E53-COV23)
(Sold separately) Adapter
1. When using self-tuning, turn ON power for the load (e.g., heater)
at the same time as or before supplying power to the Digital
Temperature Controller. If power is turned ON for the Digital
Temperature Controller before turning ON power for the load, self-
tuning will not be performed properly and optimum control will not
be achieved.
When starting operation after the Digital Temperature Controller
has warmed up, turn OFF the power and then turn it ON again at Water Proof Packing
the same time as turning ON power for the load. (Instead of turning
Panel
the Digital Temperature Controller OFF and ON again, switching
from STOP mode to RUN mode can also be used.) • E5CC-U
2. Avoid using the Digital Temperature Controller in places near a For the Wiring Socket for the E5CC-U, purchase the P2CF-11 or
radio, television set, or wireless installing. These devices can
PG3A-11 separately.
cause radio disturbances which adversely affect the performance
of the Controller.

Others
1. Do not Connect or disconnect the Conversion Cable connector
repeatedly over a short period of time.
The computer may malfunction.
2. After connecting the Conversion Cable to the computer, check the
COM port number before starting communications. The computer
requires time to recognize the cable connection. This delay does
not indicate failure.
3. Do not connect the Conversion Cable through a USB hub. Doing
so may damage the Conversion Cable. 1. For waterproof mounting, waterproof packing must be installed on
4. Do not use an extension cable to extend the Conversion Cable the Digital Temperature Controller. Waterproofing is not possible
length when connecting to the computer. Doing so may damage when group mounting several Digital Temperature Controllers.
the Conversion Cable. The E5CC-U cannot be waterproofed even if the Waterproof
Packing is inserted.
2. Insert the E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U/E5CC-T into the mounting hole
in the panel.
3. Push the adapter from the terminals up to the panel, and
temporarily fasten the E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U/E5CC-T.
4. Tighten the two fastening screws on the adapter.
Alternately tighten the two screws little by little to maintain a
balance. Tighten the screws to a torque of 0.29 to 0.39 N·m.

111
 E5@C/E5@C-T

E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC/E5EC-T/E5AC-T Mounting to and Removing from DIN Track

Adapter E5DC
Adapter • Mounting a Unit
Panel
Pull down the DIN Track hook on the Terminal Unit and catch the
Terminal Cover top hook on the DIN Track.
(E53-COV24)
Press the Unit onto the DIN Track until the DIN Track hooks are
locked in place.
2. Catch the top hook on
Terminal Cover the DIN Track.
(E53-COV24)

Water Proof Packing

1. For waterproof mounting, waterproof packing must be installed on

the Digital Temperature Controller. Waterproofing is not possible
when group mounting several Digital Temperature Controllers.
2. Insert the E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC/E5EC-T/E5AC-T into the
mounting hole in the panel. 3. Press the Unit onto
3. Push the adapter from the terminals up to the panel, and the DIN Track.
temporarily fasten the E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC/E5EC-T/E5AC-T.
4. Make sure that the hooks
4. Tighten the two fastening screws on the adapter. 1. Pull down the hook.
are locked in place.
Alternately tighten the two screws little by little to maintain a
balance. Tighten the screws to a torque of 0.29 to 0.39 N·m. • Removing a Unit
Pull down on the DIN Track Hook with a flat-blade screwdriver and
E5DC lift up the Unit.
Adapter Panel

Terminal Unit

Main Unit Removing the Main Unit

Press in the two hooks on the Main Unit and remove the Main Unit
from the Terminal Unit.
1. Insert the E5DC into the mounting hole in the panel. (Attach the
(1)
Terminal Unit after you insert the Main Unit.)
2. Push the Adapter from the Terminal Unit up to the panel, and
temporarily fasten the E5DC.
3. Tighten the two fastening screws on the Adapter. Alternately
tighten the two screws little by little to maintain a balance. Tighten
the screws to a torque of 0.29 to 0.39 N·m. (2)

(1)

End Plate Installation

Make sure to attach PFP-M End Plates to the ends of the Units.

Individual Group Mounting

Mounting

112
 E5@C/E5@C-T

Mounting the DIN Track Attaching the End Cover

Attach the DIN Track to the inside of the control panel with screws to E5DC
at least three locations. 1. Install the E5DC in a panel.
• DIN Track (sold separately)
PFP-50N (50 cm) and PFP-100N (100 cm)

Install the DIN Track vertically to the ground.

2. Peel off the release paper from the double-sided tape on the End
Cover.

Vertical: OK Horizontal: NG

Mounting the Terminal Cover

Double-sided tape
E5CC/E5CC-T
Slightly bend the E53-COV23 Terminal Cover to attach it to the
terminal block as shown in the following diagram. The Terminal Cover
cannot be attached in the opposite direction. E53-COV17 Terminal 3. Align the tabs on the End Cover with the depressions on the E5DC
Cover can be also attached. and attach the End Cover.
Make sure that the "UP" mark is facing up, and then attach the E53-
COV17 Terminal Cover to the holes on the top and bottom of the
Digital Temperature Controller.
E53-COV17 E53-COV23

Adapter
Terminal Cover
(E53-COV17) Enlarged illustration of
(Sold separately) Terminal Section

E5EC/E5AC/E5EC-T/E5AC-T
Slightly bend the E53-COV24 Terminal Cover to attach it to the
terminal block as shown in the following diagram. The Terminal Cover
cannot be attached in the opposite direction.

4. Secure the End Cover so that the double-sided tape is firmly

attached.

Slightly bend the

E53-COV24 Terminal
Cover in the direction
shown by the arrows to
attach it to the terminal block.

Enlarged illustration of the terminal part

113
 E5@C/E5@C-T

Removing the Digital Temperature Controller from the case Removing the draw-out jig when only one hook is caught
E5GC in the draw-out jig insertion hole
You can use the Y92F-55 Draw-out Jig to remove the interior body of 1. Pull the Draw-out Jig slowly in the direction shown in the figure.
the Digital Temperature Controller from the case to perform (This step is the same even if the other hook is caught.)
maintenance without removing the terminal wiring. This is possible 2. Confirm that the Draw-out jig is free of the Draw-out jig insertion
only for the E5GC. Check the specifications of the case and Digital hole.
3. If the interior body separates from the rear case, slowly press the
Temperature Controller before removing the Digital Temperature
interior body into the rear case in a horizontal direction.
Controller from the case.
If you do not follow the procedures above, the Digital Controller
may be damaged.
1. Draw out the interior body from the rear case.
1. Slowly insert the Draw-out Jig into the Draw-out Jig insertion holes (2)
laterally until it clicks into place. (There is a hole at both the top and
(1)
bottom.) (If you attempt to draw out the interior body of the Digital
Controller when only one hook is engaged, the Digital Controller (3)
may be damaged.)
Rear case
Draw-out Jig insertion holes
Front panel

Draw-out Jig
Precautions when Wiring
• Separate input leads and power lines in order to prevent external
(1)
Hook noise.
• Use crimp terminals when wiring the screw terminal.
(2) (1) • Use the suitable wiring material and crimp tools for crimp terminals.
Draw-out Jig insertion holes • Tighten the terminal screws to a torque of 0.43 to 0.58 N·m.
2. Pull out the Draw-out Jig together with the front panel. Do not pull The specified torque is 0.5 N·m for the E5CC-U.
with excessive force. Slowly pull out the Digital Controller laterally.
(If you pull the interior body out at an angle, the Digital Controller E5CC/E5EC/E5AC/E5DC/E5@C-T/E5GC
may be damaged.)
3. After the interior body is free from the rear case, support the
(Controllers with Screw Terminal) and E5CC-U
interior body with one hand and draw it out slowly in a horizontal (Plug-in model)
direction. Wire Size
2. Insert the new interior body into the rear case. Use the wire sizes and stripping lengths given in the following table.
1. When inserting the interior body back into the rear case, make
sure the PCBs are parallel to each other, mount the sealing Model Wire Size Stripping length
rubber, and press the interior body toward the rear case and into E5CC/E5EC/E5AC/
position, making sure that the sealing rubber does not move. E5DC/E5GC 6 to 8 mm
AWG24 to AWG18
2. When you press the Digital Controller into position, press down on (Controllers with (without crimp
(0.21 to 0.82 mm2)
the rear case hooks so that the case hooks securely lock in place. Screw Terminal) / terminals)
E5@C-T
(There are rear case hooks at both the top and bottom of the rear
case.) If the Digital Controller is not correctly mounted into the rear 5 to 6 mm
AWG24 to AWG14
case, the rear case may not be waterproof. When inserting the E5CC-U (without crimp
(0.21 to 2.08 mm2)
terminals)
Digital Controller, do not allow the electronic components to touch
the rear case. • If you use crimp terminals, use the stripping length that is
recommended by the manufacturer of the crimp terminals.
Top View
Rear case hooks • To reduce the affects of noise, use shielded twisted-pair cable for
Sealing rubber position PCBs
the signal lines.

(1)
Crimp Terminal
For the E5CC/E5EC/E5AC/E5DC/E5GC (Controllers with Screw
Terminal) or E5@C-T, use the following types of crimp terminals for
M3 screws.
Case hooks

* Make sure that the top and bottom PCBs are parallel to each other and 5.8 mm max.
insert them into the rear case.

(2)
Rear case hooks 5.8 mm max.

For the E5CC-U, use the following types of crimp terminals for M3.5
screws.
(2)
7.2 mm max.

7.2 mm max.

114
 E5@C/E5@C-T

• If you use crimp terminals for the E5DC, use crimp terminals with Checking Connections
insulation sleeves. If you use a bare crimp terminal with no • After insertion, pull gently on the wire to make sure that it will not
insulation, the terminal may short with the terminal above or below come out (i.e., to confirm that it is held by the terminal block).
it. If you use bare crimp terminals, cover the crimped sections with
insulating marking tubes. Secure the marking tubes so that they do
not move.

NA

OK
Although you can connect two crimp terminals with insulation
sleeves to one terminal, you cannot do so if the diameter of the
insulation sleeves is too large.

Recommended Crimp Terminals with Insulation Sleeves for the E5DC 2. Removal Method for Screwless Clamp Terminals
The same method is used to remove stranded wires, solid wires, and
Manufacturer Model number ferrules.
V1.25-B3A 1. Press the pusher with a flat-blade screwdriver.
J.S.T. Mfg. Co.
V0.5-3A 2. With the screwdriver still pressing the pusher, pull the wire out of
the terminal (Insertion) hole.
3. Remove the flat-blade screwdriver from the pusher.
E5GC (Controllers with Screwless Clamp
Terminal)
1. Connection Method for Screwless Clamp Terminals
The same method is used to connect stranded wires, solid wires, and
(2)
ferrules.

Part Names of the Terminal Block (3)

Terminal (Insertion) hole (1)

Pusher

3. Recommended Wire Size and Ferrules

Wire Size
Use the wire sizes and stripping lengths given in the following table.

Wire Size Stripping length

AWG24 to AWG18
8 to 12 mm
(0.21 to 0.82 mm2)
Connection Method
1. Press the pusher with a flat-blade screwdriver.
2. With the screwdriver still pressing the pusher, insert the wire into Ferrules
the terminal (Insertion) hole. Ferrules must be 0.8 to 1.4 mm in diameter.
3. Remove the flat-blade screwdriver from the pusher. The exposed conductor inserted into the terminal must be 8 to 12 mm
in length.

0.8 to 1.4mm

(2)
8 to 12mm

(1)
Recommended ferrules
(3)
Manufacturer name Model number
Altech Corp. 2623.0
Daido Solderless Terminal Mfg. Co. AVA-0.5
J.S.T. Mfg. Co. TUB-0.5
TGNTC-1.25-9T
TGVTC-1.25-11T
TGNTC-1.25-11T
Single (1 wire) TC0.3-9.5
Nichifu Co., Ltd. TC1.25-11S-ST
TC1.25-11S
TC2-11S
TGWVTC-1.25-9T
Double (2 wires)
TGWVTC-1.25-11T

115
 E5@C/E5@C-T

E5@C-B (Controllers with Push-In Plus Terminal)

1. Connecting Wires to the Push-In Plus Terminal Block 2. Removing Wires from the Push-In Plus Terminal Block
Part Names of the Terminal Block Use the following procedure to remove wires from the terminal block.
The same method is used to remove stranded wires, solid wires, and
ferrules.
1. Hold a flat-blade screwdriver at an angle and insert it into the
release hole.
Release hole 2. With the flat-blade screwdriver still inserted into the release hole,
remove the wire from the terminal insertion hole.
3. Remove the flat-blade screwdriver from the release hole.
Terminal (Insertion) hole
(2) (1)
Flat-blade screwdriver
Connecting Wires with Ferrules and Solid Wires
Insert the solid wire or ferrule straight into the terminal block until the
end touches the terminal block.
10 to 15°
Ferrules and (3)
Solid Wires

3. Recommended Ferrules and Crimp Tools

Recommended ferrules
Applicable wire Ferrule Recommended ferrules
Con-
ductor Manufactured Manufactured
Manufactured
If a wire is difficult to connect because it is too thin, use a flat-blade mm2 AWG length by Phoenix by
by Wago
screwdriver in the same way as when connecting stranded wire. (mm) Contact Weidmuller

0.25 24 8 AI0.25-8 H0.25/12 FE-0.25-8N-YE

Connecting Stranded Wires
Use the following procedure to connect the wires to the terminal block. 0.34 22 8 AI0.34-8 H0.34/12 FE-0.34-8N-TQ
1. Hold a flat-blade screwdriver at an angle and insert it into the 0.5 20 8 AI0.5-8 H0.5/14 FE-0.5-8N-WH
release hole. The angle should be between 10° and 15°.
If the flat-blade screwdriver is inserted correctly, you will feel the 0.75 18 8 AI0.75-8 H0.75/14 FE-0.75-8N-GY
spring in the release hole. 1 18 8 AI1-8 H1.0/14 FE-1.0-8N-RD
2. With the flat-blade screwdriver still inserted into the release hole,
insert the wire into the terminal hole until it strikes the terminal 1.5 16 8 AI1.5-8 H1.5/14 FE-1.5-8N-BK
block. CRIMPFOX6
3. Remove the flat-blade screwdriver from the release hole. Recommended crimp tool CRIMPFOX6T-F PZ6 roto Variocrimp4
CRIMPFOX10S
(2) (1) Note: 1. Make sure that the outer diameter of the wire coating is
Flat-blade screwdriver smaller than the inner diameter of the insulation sleeve of
the recommended ferrule.
2. Make sure that the ferrule processing dimensions conform
to the following figures.
10 to 15°
(3)
8 mm

Checking Connections
• After the insertion, pull gently on the wire to make sure that it will
2.1 mm max.
not come off and the wire is securely fastened to the terminal block. 2.7 mm max.
• To prevent short circuits, insert stripped part of a stranded or solid
wire or the conductor part of a ferrule until it is hidden inside the
terminal insertion hole. (See the following diagram.)

116
 E5@C/E5@C-T
Recommended Flat-blade Screwdriver Model Manufacturer
Use a flat-blade screwdriver to connect and remove wires.
XW4Z-00B Omron
Use the following flat-blade screwdriver.
The following table shows manufacturers and models as of 2015/Dec. ESD0.40✕2.5 Wera
SZF 0.4✕2.5 Phoenix Contact
Side Front
0.4✕2.5✕75 302 Wiha
2.5 mm dia. AEF.2.5✕75 Facom
210-719 Wago*
SDI 0.4✕2.5✕75 Weidmuller*

0.4 mm 2.5 mm 98 20 25 KNIPEX*

* Insulated types of Flat-blade Screw driver, strongly recommended
to prevent from an electric shock.

Three-year Guarantee
Period of Guarantee
The guarantee period of the Unit is three years starting from the date
the Unit is shipped from the factory.

Scope of Guarantee
The Unit is guaranteed under the following operating conditions.
1. Average Operating Temperature
(see note): 10C to 50C
2. Mounting Method: Standard mounting
(Mounted to panel or DIN Track.)

Top

Bottom

Example: Mounted to Panel

Note: Average Operating Temperature
Refer to the process temperature of the Unit mounted to a
control panel and connected to peripheral devices on condition
that the Unit is in stable operation, sensor input type K is
selected for the Unit, the positive and negative thermocouple
input terminals of the Unit are short-circuited, and the ambient
temperature is stable.

Should the Unit malfunction during the guarantee period, OMRON

shall repair the Unit or replace any parts of the Unit at the expense of
OMRON.

117
 MEMO

118
 Terms and Conditions Agreement
Read and understand this catalog.
Please read and understand this catalog before purchasing the products. Please consult your OMRON representative if you have
any questions or comments.

Warranties.
(a) Exclusive Warranty. Omron’s exclusive warranty is that the Products will be free from defects in materials and workmanship
for a period of twelve months from the date of sale by Omron (or such other period expressed in writing
by Omron). Omron disclaims all other warranties, express or implied.
(b) Limitations. OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, ABOUT
NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE
PRODUCTS. BUYER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT IT ALONE HAS DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL
SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR INTENDED USE.
Omron further disclaims all warranties and responsibility of any type for claims or expenses based on infringement by the Products
or otherwise of any intellectual property right. (c) Buyer Remedy. Omron’s sole obligation hereunder shall be, at Omron’s election,
to (i) replace (in the form originally shipped with Buyer responsible for labor charges for removal or replacement thereof) the
non-complying Product, (ii) repair the non-complying Product, or (iii) repay or credit Buyer an amount equal to the purchase price
of the non-complying Product; provided that in no event shall Omron be responsible for warranty, repair, indemnity or any other
claims or expenses regarding the Products unless Omron’s analysis confirms that the Products were properly handled, stored,
installed and maintained and not subject to contamination, abuse, misuse or inappropriate modification. Return of any Products by
Buyer must be approved in writing by Omron before shipment. Omron Companies shall not be liable for the suitability or
unsuitability or the results from the use of Products in combination with any electrical or electronic components, circuits, system
assemblies or any other materials or substances or environments. Any advice, recommendations or information given orally or in
writing, are not to be construed as an amendment or addition to the above warranty.
See http://www.omron.com/global/ or contact your Omron representative for published information.

Limitation on Liability; Etc.

OMRON COMPANIES SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,
LOSS OF PROFITS OR PRODUCTION OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS,
WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED IN CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY.
Further, in no event shall liability of Omron Companies exceed the individual price of the Product on which liability is asserted.

Suitability of Use.
Omron Companies shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards, codes or regulations which apply to the
combination of the Product in the Buyer’s application or use of the Product. At Buyer’s request, Omron will provide applicable
third party certification documents identifying ratings and limitations of use which apply to the Product. This information by itself
is not sufficient for a complete determination of the suitability of the Product in combination with the end product, machine,
system, or other application or use. Buyer shall be solely responsible for determining appropriateness of the particular Product
with respect to Buyer’s application, product or system. Buyer shall take application responsibility in all cases.
NEVER USE THE PRODUCT FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR PROPERTY OR IN LARGE
QUANTITIES WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO ADDRESS THE RISKS,
AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCT(S) IS PROPERLY RATED AND INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE
OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM.

Programmable Products.
Omron Companies shall not be responsible for the user’s programming of a programmable Product, or any consequence
thereof.

Performance Data.
Data presented in Omron Company websites, catalogs and other materials is provided as a guide for the user in determining
suitability and does not constitute a warranty. It may represent the result of Omron’s test conditions, and the user must correlate it
to actual application requirements. Actual performance is subject to the Omron’s Warranty and Limitations of Liability.

Change in Specifications.
Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other reasons. It is our practice
to change part numbers when published ratings or features are changed, or when significant construction changes are made.
However, some specifications of the Product may be changed without any notice. When in doubt, special part numbers may be
assigned to fix or establish key specifications for your application. Please consult with your Omron’s representative at any time to
confirm actual specifications of purchased Product.

Errors and Omissions.

Information presented by Omron Companies has been checked and is believed to be accurate; however, no responsibility is
assumed for clerical, typographical or proofreading errors or omissions.
OMRON Corporation Industrial Automation Company Authorized Distributor:
Kyoto, JAPAN
Contact: www.ia.omron.com
Regional Headquarters
OMRON EUROPE B.V. OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC
Wegalaan 67-69, 2132 JD Hoofddorp 2895 Greenspoint Parkway, Suite 200
The Netherlands Hoffman Estates, IL 60169 U.S.A.
Tel: (31)2356-81-300/Fax: (31)2356-81-388 Tel: (1) 847-843-7900/Fax: (1) 847-843-7787

OMRON ASIA PACIFIC PTE. LTD. OMRON (CHINA) CO., LTD. © OMRON Corporation 2011-2016 All Rights Reserved.
No. 438A Alexandra Road # 05-05/08 (Lobby 2), Room 2211, Bank of China Tower, In the interest of product improvement,
Alexandra Technopark, 200 Yin Cheng Zhong Road, specifications are subject to change without notice.
Singapore 119967 PuDong New Area, Shanghai, 200120, China
Tel: (65) 6835-3011/Fax: (65) 6835-2711 Tel: (86) 21-5037-2222/Fax: (86) 21-5037-2200 Cat. No. H177-E2-09-X 0316 (1111)